2008 Town and Country OM 3rd R1

2008 Town & Countr y
2008
OWNER S MANUAL
Town & Countr y
81-026-0817 First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the features and equipment that are either standard or op-
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefor. tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL description of features and equipment that are no longer
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
accidents. disregard any features and equipment described in this
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood manual that are not on this vehicle.
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, dont drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
WARNING!
ously manufactured.
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright 2007 Chrysler LLC
SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 10
INTRODUCTION 1
CONTENTS
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This Owners Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
The detailed Index at the back of this manual contains a
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet
complete listing of all subjects.
and various customer-oriented documents. You are
urged to read these publications carefully. Following the Consult the following table for a description of the
instructions and recommendations in this manual will symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. this Owners Manual.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine Mopar parts, and is interested
in your satisfaction.
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures that could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not
read this entire manual you may miss important infor-
mation. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the Auto-
mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window Vehicle Identification Number
on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title. NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Remote Starting System If Equipped . . . . . . . .27
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Sentry Key Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Security Alarm System If Equipped . . . . . . . . .18 Power Door Locks If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .32
Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Illuminated Entry System If Equipped . . . . . . .20 Power Vent Windows If Equipped . . . . . . . .36
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) If Equipped . . . . .21 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Using The RKE Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Sliding Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Power Sliding Side Door If Equipped . . . . . .41
Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock . . . . . .45
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Power Liftgate If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Storage Bin Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Safety Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . .66
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Strap
Airbag System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Front Seat Airbag Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Reinstalling Storage Bin Cover Emergency
Release Strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . . .72
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Integrated Child Seat If Equipped . . . . . . . .80
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
Rear Seat Delete Feature Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

(Commercial Vehicles Only) If Equipped . . . . .89
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
Restraining Infants And Small Children With The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Seat Delete Feature (Commercial Vehicles Only) . .90
2
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .92 Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
with integrated ignition Key and a Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) with integral ignition switch. You can insert
the double-sided key into the ignition switch with either
side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three of
which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detented
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON. The START position is WIN Ignition Positions
a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When re-
leased from the START position, the switch automatically
returns to the detented ON position.
Integrated Ignition Key

The integrated ignition key operates the ignition switch.
It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-
mitter and a valet key, which stores in the rear of the 2
transmitter.
The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the
battery in the vehicle or the transmitter go dead. The
valet key is also for locking the glove box. You can keep
the valet key with you when valet parking.
To remove the valet key from the transmitter, slide the
mechanical latch at the top of the transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your Valet Key Removal
other hand. NOTE: You can insert the double-sided valet key into
the lock cylinder with either side up.
Tip Start Feature

WARNING!
1. Do not press the accelerator pedal during this process.
NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
2. Insert the integrated ignition key into the ignition unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
switch. number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
3. Turn the ignition switch to the START position and ously or fatally injured. Dont leave the key in the
release it as soon as the starter engages. ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle
The starter motor will continue to run and will disengage
automatically when the engine begins running.
Ignition Key Removal CAUTION!
Place the gear selector lever in PARK. Turn the ignition
key to the OFF position and then remove the key. An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors
NOTE: Power Window switches will also remain active
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
for up to 90 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned OFF, depending upon the accessory delay setting.
Opening the front door will cancel this feature.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
If you open the drivers door with the integrated ignition if an invalid RKE transmitter is used to operate the
key in the ignition, a chime will sound to remind you to ignition switch.
remove the key.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, the
2
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds Vehicle Security Light located on the instrument cluster
when the integrated ignition key is placed in the OFF or will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
ACC position. remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is
a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unautho- someone used an invalid RKE transmitter to start the
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation being shut off after two seconds.
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked. If the Vehicle Security Light, located on the instrument
cluster, turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle
The system uses the factory-mated Remote Keyless Entry running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that
(RKE) transmitter with integrated key and Wireless Igni- there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have
tion Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle opera- the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
tion. Therefore, only RKE transmitters that are pro-
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
NOTE: Replacement Keys

The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
NOTE: Only RKE transmitters that are programmed to
with aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these
the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate
systems may result in vehicle starting problems and
the vehicle. Once a transmitter is programmed to a
loss of security protection.
vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
Exxon/Mobil Speedpass, additional RKE transmit-
ters, or any other transponder-equipped components CAUTION!
on the same key chain will not cause a fault unless the
additional part is physically held against the trans- Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all
mitter being used to start the vehicle. Cell phones, doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
pagers, or other RF electronics will not cause interfer-
ence with this system.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
All of the RKE transmitters provided with your new with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics. Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of RKE trans-
mitters. Duplication of RKE transmitters may be per-
formed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer
Key Programming procedure. This procedure consists of
programming a blank transmitter to the vehicle electron- After 10 seconds, a chime will sound and the Vehicle
ics. A blank transmitter is one that has never been Security Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch
programmed. to the OFF position and remove the second key.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer 3. Insert a blank integrated key into the ignition switch
2
system serviced, bring all vehicle RKE transmitters with and turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60
you to the authorized dealer. seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound and
the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing, turn the
Customer Key Programming
ignition switch on again for three seconds, and then turn
If you have two valid RKE transmitters with integrated
it off.
keys, you can program new transmitters to the system by
performing the following steps: The new integrated key is programmed. The Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be pro-
1. Insert the first valid integrated key into the ignition
grammed during this procedure.
switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON position for
at least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove do not have a programmed RKE transmitter with inte-
the first key. grated key, contact your authorized dealer for details.
2. Insert the second valid integrated key and turn the
ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys- The Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the vehicle
tems memory. This will prevent the lost key from doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an system provides both audible and visual signals. For the
authorized dealer at the time of service to be repro- first three minutes the horn will sound and the headlights
grammed. and Vehicle Security Light will flash repeatedly. For an
additional 15 minutes only the headlights and security
General Information
telltale will flash. The engine will run only if a valid key
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15
is used to start the vehicle.
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions: Rearming Of The System
The Security System will rearm itself after the 15 addi-
This device may not cause harmful interference.
tional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security Light
This device must accept any interference that may be flashing, if the system has not been disabled. If the
received, including interference that may cause undes- condition which initiated the alarm is still present, the
ired operation. system will ignore that condition and monitor the re-
maining doors and ignition.
Arming The System Disarm The System

Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
a power door lock switch while the driver or passenger or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and
door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote turn the key to the ON position. 2
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After all the doors are
NOTE:
locked and closed the Vehicle Security Light in the
The drivers door key cylinder and the liftgate button
instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
system is arming. The Vehicle Security Light in the
system.
instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16
seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set. After the The system remains armed during liftgate entry. Press-
alarm is set, the Vehicle Security Light, located in the ing the liftgate button will not disarm the system. If
instrument cluster, will flash at a slower rate to indicate someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and
that the system is armed. opens any door the alarm will sound.
NOTE: If the Vehicle Security Light stays on continu- When the system is armed, the interior power door
ously during vehicle operation, have the system checked lock switches will not unlock the doors.
by your authorized dealer.
The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect
your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously described arming sequences has occurred, the ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED
system will arm regardless of whether you are in the The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open the
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the doors. This feature is only available if you have RKE.
system.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 10 seconds
If the Security Alarm System is armed and the battery or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
becomes disconnected, the system will remain armed switch is turned ON.
when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
NOTE:
flash, the horn will sound, and the ignition will not start
The front courtesy overhead console, door courtesy
the vehicle. If this occurs, disarm the system.
and liftgate lights do not turn on if the dimmer control
Tamper Alert is in the interior lights ON position (extreme top
If something has triggered the system in your absence, position).
the horn will sound three times when you unlock the
The Illuminated Entry System will not operate if the
doors and the security telltale light will flash for 30
dimmer control is in the extreme downward position.
seconds. Check the vehicle for tampering.
Security System Manual Override
The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the
manual door lock plunger.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) IF Using The RKE Transmitter

EQUIPPED Three-button transmitters will provide basic UNLOCK,
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and LOCK and PANIC functions.
liftgate, and activate the PANIC alarm, optional power 2
liftgate, left power sliding door, and right power sliding
door from distances up to about 23 ft (7 m) using a
hand-held radio RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter
need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: If the key is in the ignition switch, then all
buttons on that RKE transmitter will be disabled. The
buttons on the remaining transmitters will work. If the
gear selector lever is out of PARK, all the RKE transmitter
buttons are disabled for all keys.
Two transmitters may be supplied with the vehicle.
Vehicles built without the powered options will be Three-Button RKE transmitter Fob With Integrated Key
equipped from the factory with three-button transmitters Seven-button transmitters will provide functions that
and those built with power options will be equipped allow the same basic operation as the three-button, but
with up to seven-buttons on the transmitter. may also be used to OPEN/CLOSE the optional power
liftgate, left power sliding door, or right power sliding To UNLOCK Doors And Liftgate
door. Other options of the system allow you to turn Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
ON/OFF the Sound Horn with Remote Lock and Flash transmitter once to unlock the drivers door or twice to
Lights with Remote Key LOCK features. unlock all doors and liftgate. The illuminated entry
system also turns on.
Remote Key Unlock
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the drivers side door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to Remote Key
Unlock, under Personal Settings (Customer Pro-
grammable Features) under Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC) in Section 4 of this manual for
details.
Seven-Button RKE transmitter Fob With Integrated Key
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, the Remote Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
UNLOCK feature can be enabled or disabled by per- This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
forming the following procedure: are locked with the RKE transmitter.
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the If desired, the Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock feature
2
vehicle. can be turned on and off by performing the following
procedure:
2. Press the LOCK button for five to ten seconds.
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
3. While the LOCK button is pressed, (after five seconds)
vehicle.
press the UNLOCK button. Release both buttons.
2. Press the LOCK button for five to ten seconds.
The Remote Key Unlock feature can be reactivated by
repeating the above procedure or by performing the 3. While the LOCK button is pressed (after five seconds),
procedure in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center press the PANIC button. Release both buttons.
(EVIC), Customer Programmable Features section on
The Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock feature can be
vehicles so equipped.
reactivated by repeating this procedure or by performing
To LOCK Doors And Liftgate the procedure in the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter (EVIC), Customer Programmable Features section on
ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The horn will chirp once vehicles so equipped.
to acknowledge the signal.
Using The PANIC Alarm If the button is pushed while the liftgate is being power
To turn the PANIC Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and closed, the liftgate will reverse to the full open position.
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with a
least one second and release. When the PANIC Alarm is powered liftgate, pressing the button twice will result in
on, the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will the liftgate becoming unlocked for 30 seconds allowing
pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on. you to manually access the liftgate area.
The PANIC Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second pressing the button located on the overhead console.
time or by turning the ignition switch to the ON position.
If equipped with a rear interior switch on the left rear
NOTE: When you turn off the PANIC Alarm by press- pillar, pushing once will close the liftgate only. The
ing the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be liftgate cannot be opened from this switch.
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system. Open/Close Power Left Power Sliding Door If
Equipped
Open/Close Power Liftgate If Equipped Press the Left Power Sliding Door button twice on the
Press the LIFTGATE button twice on the RKE transmitter RKE transmitter within five seconds to Open/Close
within five seconds to Open/Close Power Liftgate. The Power Left Power Sliding Door. If the button is pushed
liftgate will beep for three seconds and then open/close. while the door is being power-closed, the door will
reverse to the full open position.
Open/Close Power Right Power Sliding Door If 3. While the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is
Equipped pressed, (after five seconds) press the LOCK button.
Press the Right Power Sliding Door button twice on the Release both buttons.
RKE transmitter within five seconds to Open/Close
The Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock feature can be
2
Power Right Power Sliding Door. If the button on the
reactivated by repeating this procedure or by performing
RKE transmitter is pushed while the door is being power
the procedure in Section Four, Electronic Vehicle Infor-
closed, the door will reverse to the full open position.
mation Center (EVIC), Customer Programmable Fea-
Turn Off Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock If tures on vehicles so equipped.
Equipped
The table below explains the Lamp Flash options.
If desired, the Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock feature
can be turned on and off by performing the following Which Turn Number of
Function
procedure: Signal Lamps Flashes
Lock All 1
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
Unlock 1st Press Left Side 2
vehicle.
Unlock All Doors All 2
2. Press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter for Left Side Left Side 2
five to ten seconds. Right Side Right Side 2
Liftgate All 2
Programming Additional RKE Transmitters

Refer to Sentry Key Immobilizer System Customer
Key Programming.
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Replacing the RKE Transmitter Battery
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material special handling may
apply. See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on Battery Replacement
the back housing or the printed circuit board. 2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear of
battery deterioration. If you touch the battery, clean it
the RKE transmitter. Insert a small, flat bladed screw-
with rubbing alcohol.
driver into the slot and gently pry open the access door.
3. Reposition the access door panel over the battery
opening and snap into place.
General Information REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and Remote Starting conveniently starts the engine from
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the outside the vehicle by using the Remote Keyless Entry
following conditions: (RKE) transmitter while maintaining the Security Alarm 2
System. The Remote Starting System has a targeted range
of 328 ft (100 m). In order to Remote Start your vehicle,
This device must accept any interference received, the hood, liftgate, and all the doors must be closed and
including interference that may cause undesired op- the transmission gear selector lever in PARK.
eration.
NOTE: Remote Starting requires automatic transaxle-
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal equipped vehicles.
distance, check for these two conditions.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
How To Use Remote Start To Enter Remote Start Mode

All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will Remote Start:
Gear shift lever in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Trunk closed
HAZARD switch off
BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
Remote Starting Button
Battery at an acceptable charge level, and
Press and release the Remote Start button on
RKE PANIC button not pressed. the RKE transmitter twice, within five seconds.
The parking lights will flash and the horn will
honk twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start To Enter the Vehicle After Remote Start
and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a
a 15 minute cycle. Remote Start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the
NOTE:
UNLOCK button on the transmitter. After the vehicle is 2
unlocked, you have 60 seconds to enter the vehicle, insert
If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
the key into the ignition switch and move it to the RUN
will automatically LOCK the doors.
position, otherwise the engine will cancel Remote Start-
The park lights will turn on and remain on during ing and automatically turn off.
Remote Start mode.
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle
For security, power window and power sunroof op- Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and release
eration (if so equipped) are disabled when the vehicle the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
is in the Remote Start mode. the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch
15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
to the ON position.
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third NOTE:
cycle. The ignition switch must be in the ON position in
order to drive the vehicle.
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start
Information Center (EVIC), the message Insert Key/ Mode
Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you insert Press and release the Remote Start button one time.
the key. Once inserted, the message Turn To Run
NOTE: To avoid inadvertent shut downs, the system
will flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to run.
will disable the one time press of the Remote Start button
Cancel Remote Start for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following request.
occur:
When To Reset Remote Start
The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500. The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of
Any engine warning telltale lights come on. two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one
failed start, where the Remote Starting sequence was
The hood is opened. initiated but the engine stopped cranking without start-
The Hazard Switch is pressed. ing. After either of these conditions, or if the Security
Alarm System is alarming, or if the PANIC button was
The transmission gear selector lever is moved out of
pressed, the vehicle must be reset by inserting a valid key
PARK.
into the ignition switch, rotating to the RUN position,
Pressing the brake pedal. and then rotating back to the LOCK/OFF position.
Allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
DOOR LOCKS If the lock plunger is down when you shut the door, the
door will lock. Therefore, make sure the keys are not
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Lock the doors by pushing down on the lock plungers on
each door trim panel.
2
Sliding Door Lock Features

Manual Door Lock Plunger
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event of an

accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
and from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle.
Do not leave unattended children in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per-
sonal injuries and death.
Driver Power Door Locks
1 - Unlock 2 - Lock
Power Door Locks If Equipped
A power door lock switch is located on each front door If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
tally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and Lock Doors Automatically If Equipped
a door is open, as a reminder to remove the key. If the Lock Doors Automatically feature is enabled, your
door locks will lock automatically when the vehicles
speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). 2
The Lock Doors Automatically feature is enabled when
your vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant and can
be disabled by using the following procedure:
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, refer to Personal Settings in the
EVIC section of this manual.
On non EVIC-equipped vehicles perform the follow-
ing steps:
Front Passenger Power Door Switch Features 1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
1 - Window Open/Close 3 - Doors Unlock
2 - Doors Lock
2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will
cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
If you press the power door lock switch while the sliding programming procedure.)
door is open, the sliding door will lock.
3. Place the key into the ignition. The Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
feature can be reactivated by repeating the above men-
4. Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition key from the OFF
tioned procedure or by performing the procedure in the
position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of four
EVIC, Customer Programmable Features section on ve-
times, ending in the OFF position (do not start the
hicles so equipped.
engine).
Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit If
5. Within 30 seconds, press the drivers door lock switch
Equipped
in the lock direction.
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature unlocks
6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has all of the doors of the vehicle when any door is opened.
been disabled. This will occur only after the gear selector lever has been
shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle has been
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
driven (the gear selector lever has been shifted out of
If a chime is not heard, the program mode was canceled PARK and all doors closed).
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will not
the above procedure.
operate if there is any manual operation of the power
door locks (lock or unlock).
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature can be 6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
enabled or disabled by performing the following proce- been changed.
dure:
7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2
If a chime is not heard, the program mode was canceled
2. Fasten your seat belt. (Fastening the seat belt will before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this the above procedure.
programming procedure.)
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature can be
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch. reactivated by repeating the above mentioned procedure
or by performing the procedure in the EVIC, Customer
4. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition key from the OFF
Programmable Features section on vehicles so equipped.
position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of four
times ending in the OFF position (Do not start the NOTE: Use the Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24
engine). km/h) and Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit features
in accordance with local laws.
5. Within 30 seconds, press the drivers door lock switch
in the unlock direction.
WINDOWS POWER WINDOWS

You can control all windows using switches on the
POWER VENT WINDOWS IF EQUIPPED
drivers door trim panel. The switches will operate only
Switches on the drivers door trim panel let the driver
when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position
operate the two vent windows from the drivers seat.
and during power accessory delay.
NOTE: Power Window switches will also remain active
for up to 90 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned OFF, depending upon the accessory delay setting.
Opening the front door will cancel this feature.
Power Vent Window Switches

1 Open 2 Close
Drivers Master Power Window Switches Power Window Lockout Switch If Equipped
The driver may lock out all power windows by depress-
ing the bar switch just below the power window switches.
2
Drivers Power Window Switches

1 - Left Rear 3 - Left Front
2 - Right Rear 4 - Right Front Power Window Lockout Switch
Front Passenger Power Window Switch
There is a single switch on the front passengers door
trim panel which operates the passenger door window
and locks and unlocks all doors. The switch will operate Sliding Side Door Power Window Switch
only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC There is a single switch on each sliding side door which
position and during power accessory delay. operates the sliding side door window.
The switches will operate only when the ignition switch
is in the ON or ACC position.
Front Passenger Power Switches

1 - Window Open/Close 3 - Doors Unlock
2 - Doors Lock
Sliding Door Power Window Switch
NOTE: The sliding door windows do not fully open, Auto Up Feature With AntiPinch Protection If
stopping several inches above the window sill. Equipped
The left front window switch may be equipped with an
Auto Down Feature If Equipped
The left and right front window switches may be
Auto Up feature. Lift the window switch to the second 2
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
equipped with an auto down feature. Press the window
switch past the detent, release, and the window will go To stop the window from going all the way up during the
down automatically. Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To open the window part way, press the window switch To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
part way and release it when you want the window to the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop. stop.
The power window switches remain active for up to 90 NOTE:
seconds (depending on the accessory delay setting) after If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
the ignition switch has been turned off. Opening a close, it will reverse direction and then stop. Remove
vehicle front door will cancel this feature. the obstacle and use the window switch again to close
the window.
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger 2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto- detent to open the window completely and continue to
close. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
detent and hold to close window manually. the window is fully open.
Wind Buffeting
WARNING!
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
the window path before closing. open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
Auto Up Reset If Equipped together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the following with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
steps after vehicle power is restored: minimize the buffeting.
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
SLIDING SIDE DOOR door after the hold-open latch is activated, you must
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or the rock the inside handle forward or pull outward on the
outside. Pull outward on exterior handle to open the outside handle.
sliding door. The sliding door inside handle functions by
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully latched
2
rocking forward and back. Rocking the handle back-
anytime the vehicle is in motion.
wards opens the door and rocking forward releases the
hold open latch in order to close the door. NOTE: The left side sliding door cannot be opened
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
To keep your door operating properly, observe the fol-
when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
lowing guidelines:
fuel door.
Always open the door smoothly.
POWER SLIDING SIDE DOOR IF EQUIPPED
Avoid high impacts against the door stop when open- The power sliding door may be opened manually or by
ing the door. This is very important when your vehicle using the buttons on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
is parked on an incline as the door will slide faster in transmitter.
the downhill direction.
Press the button on the transmitter twice within five
There is a hold-open latch that is activated when the seconds, to open a power sliding door. When the door is
sliding door is fully opened. This latch will keep your fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds
sliding door open on any incline. To close the sliding a second time will close the door.
There are also power sliding side door switches located

on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding door
for the rear seat passengers. Pressing the switch once will
open the power sliding door. When the door is fully open
pressing the switch a second time will close the door.
NOTE: The power sliding side door must be unlocked
before the power sliding door switches will operate.
Power Sliding Door Detail

1 Heated Seat Switch 4 Door Handle
2 Power Window Switch 5 Power Sliding Door
Switch
3 Manual Lock
If the inside or outside door handles are used while the If the power sliding side door is not in the full open or
power sliding side door is activated, the power sliding close position, it will fully open when a power sliding
door feature will be canceled and the door must be door switch is pressed. To close the door, wait until it
opened or closed manually. is fully open and then press the switch again. 2
To avoid unintentional operation of the power sliding The power sliding side door switches will not operate
doors from the rear seats, press the power sliding door if the transmission gear selector lever is in gear or the
master lock button, located in the overhead console, to vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
disable the switches for the rear seat passengers.
If the power sliding door encounters multiple obstruc-
NOTE: tions within the same cycle, the system will automati-
If anything obstructs the power sliding side door cally stop and must be opened or closed manually.
while it is closing or opening, the door will automati-
cally reverse to the closed or open position, provided WARNING!
it meets sufficient resistance.
You, or others, could be injured if caught in the path
The left side sliding door cannot be opened while the of the sliding door. Make sure the door path is clear
fuel door is open. This feature operates only when the before closing the door.
sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the fuel
door.
Power Sliding Side Door Open Flash Power Sliding Side Door Master Lock Switch
The left and right exterior hazard lights will flash for 12 The power sliding side doors may also be opened by
seconds when either sliding door is opened. This will pressing the switches on the overhead console or the
alert other drivers in the area that passenger(s) could be switches located on the trim panel just in front of the
entering or exiting the vehicle. sliding door.
The Sliding Side Door Open Flash can be enabled or To provide a safer environment for small children riding
disabled by performing the following procedure: in the rear seats, the second row power sliding door
switches may be overridden by pressing the Master Lock
1. Place the key in the ignition switch.
Out Switch located in the front overhead console to the
2. Cycle the ignition switch ON/OFF four times ending ON position.
in the OFF position. (Do not start the engine).
3. Within 10 seconds of the final cycle, press the hazard
switch.
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have
successfully completed the programming.
You can turn the feature back on by repeating the above
mentioned procedure.
Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock

To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the sliding doors are equipped with a
child protection door lock system. 2
NOTE: When the child lock system is engaged, the door
can be opened only by using the outside door handle
even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
Overhead Console Power Sliding Door Master Switch

1 Left Door 3 Right Door
2 Liftgate 4 Master Lock
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock NOTE:

After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock, al-
1. Open the sliding side door.
ways test the door from the inside to make certain it is
2. Slide the child lock control inward (toward the ve- in the desired position.
hicle) to engage the Child Protection Door Lock.
When the Child Protection Door Lock system is en-
gaged, (even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position) the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle, the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter, the switches on the overhead console, or
the switches located on the trim panel just in front of
the power sliding door.
The power sliding side door will operate from the
switches located on the trim panel just in front of the
power sliding door, regardless of the Child Protection
Door Lock lever position. To avoid unintentional
operation of the power sliding door from the rear
Child Protection Door Lock seats, press the Master Lock Out Switch located in
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door. the front overhead console to the ON position.
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock

WARNING!
1. Open the sliding side door.
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the sliding doors can only be opened 2. Slide the child lock control outward (away from the 2
from the outside door handle or the switches located vehicle) to disengage the Child Protection Door Lock.
on the trim panel just in front of the power sliding 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite sliding door (if
door when the child protection locks are engaged. equipped).
LIFTGATE
On vehicles equipped with power locks, the liftgate can
be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter button, or by activating the power door lock
switches located on the front doors.
To open the liftgate, depress the liftgate release handle If the liftgate is locked and is not equipped with the
located on the underside of the license plate bar and pull power liftgate feature, pressing the button on the RKE
the liftgate open with one fluid motion. transmitter will result in the liftgate becoming unlocked
for 30 seconds allowing you to manually access the
liftgate area.
POWER LIFTGATE IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened manually or by using
the button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit-
ter. Press the button on the transmitter twice within five
seconds, to open the power liftgate. When the liftgate is
fully open, pressing the button twice within five seconds,
a second time, will close the liftgate.
When the RKE transmitter button is pressed and the
Flash Lights feature is enabled, the tail lights will flash to
Liftgate Handle Location signal that the liftgate is opening or closing.
The power liftgate may also be opened and closed by The power liftgate may be closed by pressing the button,
pressing the button located on the front overhead con- located in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening.
sole. Pushing once will only close the liftgate. This button
cannot be used to open the liftgate. 2
Overhead Console Master Power Switch Detail

1 Left Door 3 Right Door Liftgate Rear Switch
2 Liftgate 4 Master Lock
The power liftgate must be in the full open or close

WARNING!
positions for any of the buttons to operate. If the
During power operation, personal injury or cargo liftgate is not in the full open or close positions, it must
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is be opened or closed manually.
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched If the liftgate release button is activated while the
before driving away. power liftgate is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the
full open position.
NOTE: The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is transmission gear selector lever is in gear or the
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
meets sufficient resistance. below 12F (24C) or temperatures above 143F
There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the (62C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere along these from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
strips will cause the liftgate to return to the open liftgate buttons.
position.
If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
within the same cycle, the system will automatically However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
stop and must be opened or closed manually. ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather. 2
WARNING!
STORAGE BIN SAFETY WARNING
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
Safety Warnings
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep WARNING!
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle. Always close the storage bin covers when your ve-
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, hicle is unattended. Do not allow children to have
make sure that all windows are closed, and the access to the second row seat storage bins. Once in
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. the storage bin, young children may not be able to
DO NOT use the recirculation mode. escape. If trapped in the storage bin, children can die
from suffocation or heat stroke.
WARNING! CAUTION!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the seat The storage bin cover must be flat and locked to
storage bin covers are not properly latched. avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
DO NOT drive the vehicle with the storage bin which have minimal clearance to the cover.
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched NOTE: Your vehicle may be built with a release strap or
while the vehicle is in motion. release lever attached to the Storage Bin Cover latch
DO NOT use a storage bin latch as a tie down. mechanism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever If
Equipped
As a security measure, your vehicle may be built with a
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release lever built into the
storage bin cover latching mechanism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Strap If

Equipped
As a security measure, your vehicle may be built with a
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release strap built into the 2
storage bin cover latching mechanism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever

NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pushing on the glow-in-the-dark
lever attached to the storage bin cover latching mecha-
nism. Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Strap
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside

the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark strap
attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
Reinstalling Storage Bin Cover Emergency
Release Strap
If the storage bin cover strap disengages from the latch, it
can be reinstalled by inserting the loose end of the strap
into the latch mechanism.
Push the strap into the latch mechanism until it engages
around the latch post.
Reinstalling Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Strap
NOTE: Do not use the storage bin emergency release
strap to lift the storage bin cover. The strap is intended
for emergency release only.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS All seat belt systems (except the drivers, Swivel n Go,
Some of the most important safety features in your and third row center position) include Automatic
vehicle are the restraint systems: Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the seat belt
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
webbing into position by extending the belt all the 2
way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired
positions
length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in
Pretensioning and load-limiting retractors for the front a seat.
seat belts
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-size
Advanced multistage driver and new active-vent front seat belts, your seat belts or the Lower Anchors and
passenger airbags Tether for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to
hold infant and child restraint systems.
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel NOTE: The front airbags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
Knee Bolsters/Blockers for front seat occupants
inflation that are based on collision severity.
Front seat belt retractors incorporate pretensioners to
Please pay close attention to the information in this
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
energy during an impact event.
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the

WARNING!
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer be belted at all times.
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled Lap/Shoulder Belts
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other All seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Shoulder Belts.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly. The belt webbing in the retractor is designed to lock
during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature
allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even you under normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen the vehicle or being thrown out.
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
WARNING! WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people belts are designed to go around the large bones of 2
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously your body. These are the strongest parts of your
injured or killed. body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
WARNING! suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat sengers safe, too.
belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Two people should never be belted into a single seat

belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat. Latch Plate
2. The seat belt latch plate is near the seatback of the
front seats and next to your arm in the rear seats. Grasp
the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go
around your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

WARNING!
plate into the buckle until you hear a click.
A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the 2
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs arent as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron-
gest bones will take the force in a collision.
WARNING!
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect

you from injury during a collision. You are more Latch Plate To Buckle
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
WARNING!
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will

not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
Removing Slack From Belt
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.

WARNING!
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces wont be allow the belt to retract fully. 2
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos- WARNING!
sible and keep it snug.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
A twisted belt cant do its job as well. In a collision leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
If you cant straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
your authorized dealer and have it fixed. not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is etc.).
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Third Row Center Shoulder Belt Instructions
The shoulder belt for the third row center seat is located
in the headliner slightly behind the third row seat.
Pull the strap down and secure the small latch plate of pushing anywhere on the anchorage. To move the an-
the lap belt into the small buckle until you hear a click. chorage downward, squeeze the actuation buttons while
simultaneously pushing down on the anchorage assem-
Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
bly.
comfortable and not resting on your neck. When the belt
is long enough to fit, insert the large latch plate into the As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
buckle until you hear a click prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
To release the small latch plate, position the end of the it is locked in position.
large latch plate against the red button on the small
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode If
buckle and push upward. Reinstall the latch plates into
Equipped
the headliner.
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
In the front seats and the second row outboard seats, the the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is avail-
shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-
downward to help position the belt away from your tion lap/shoulder belt.
neck. The upper anchorage can be adjusted upward by
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Seat Belt Pretensioners

Use The Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety The seat belts for both front seating positions are
seat is installed in a passenger seating position. Children equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
12 years old and younger should be properly restrained remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. 2
in the rear seat whenever possible. These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
1. Buckle the combination lap/shoulder belt. including those in child restraints.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
the entire belt is extracted. belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
now in the automatic locking mode. straint Controller (ORC). Like the front airbags, the
pretensioners are single use items. After a collision that is
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners,
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
both must be replaced.
it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock-
ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
(BeltAlert) 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
If the occupied drivers seat belt has not been buckled or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recom-
within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle mend deactivating BeltAlert.
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert will
1. With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any
alert the driver to buckle the seat belt. The driver should
position except ON or START, buckle the drivers seat
also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
belt.
Once the warning is triggered, BeltAlert will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (engine
seconds or until the drivers seat belt is buckled. does not need to be running), and wait for the Seat Belt
Warning Light to turn off.
BeltAlert will be reactivated if the drivers seat belt is
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle 3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). ON/RUN position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the
drivers seat belt at least three times within 60 seconds,
BeltAlert Programming
ending with the seat belt buckled.
BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer or by following these steps: NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. A single Seat Belt Extender
chime will sound to signify that you have successfully If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
completed the programming. when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized 2
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
NOTE: Although BeltAlert has been deactivated, the extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
the drivers seat belt remains unbuckled. tender and stow it.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
WARNING!
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
the best way to keep the baby safe. increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. low and snug, and in the recommended seating
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the positions. Remove and store the extender when not
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take needed.
the force if there is a collision.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag window. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags,
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front they are located above the side windows and their covers
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
systems. The drivers front airbag is mounted in the
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
center of the steering wheel. The passengers front airbag
trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on Airbag System Components
the airbag covers. The airbag system consists of the following:
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
Airbag Telltale Light
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
Driver Airbag
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size. Front Passenger Airbag
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect
Steering Wheel and Column
the driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a
Instrument Panel
Seat Belt Reminder Light The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of
Knee Impact Bolster
the second stage determines whether the output force is
Front Seat Belt Retractor Pretensioners low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet 2
the need, the second stage is expended later in the crash
Front Seat Track Position Sensors
event.
Supplemental Seat Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains
Driver Airbag Special Features
(SABIC) If Equipped
Driver airbag deployment and force level is controlled by
Front Seat Side-mounted (Thorax) Airbags If the drivers seat position as well as impact severity. Use
Equipped of special inflators result in a very compact drivers side
airbag.
Front Seat Airbag Features
The front airbag system has dual-stage driver and front In addition to the small size, the inflating gases exit
passenger airbags. This system provides output appro- through strategically placed vents, which direct the gas
priate to the level of crash severity as determined by the away from the occupant.
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) and the impact
sensors at the front of the car.
Front Passenger Airbag Special Features

A new active venting front passenger airbag is designed
to reduce the risk of occupants who may be out of
position by the use of active vents positioned on each
side of the airbag.
Supplemental Front Seat-Mounted Thorax Side
Airbags If Equipped
Front seat-mounted side (Thorax) airbags provide en-
hanced protection and work together with supplemental
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to help protect
an occupant during a side impact. The seat-mounted side
airbag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the Thorax Airbag Label
outboard side of the seat.
When the airbag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seats trim cover. Each airbag
deploys independently, that is a left side impact deploys
the left airbag only and a right-side impact deploys only
the right airbag.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain

WARNING!
(SABIC) If Equipped
Do not put anything on or around the airbag SABIC Airbags offer side-impact and vehicle rollover
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in 2
damage the airbags and you could be injured addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
because the airbag inflation capability may be airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
compromised. The protective covers for the airbag head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
cushions are designed to open only when the for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down-
airbags are inflating. ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects NOTE: Should a vehicle rollover occur, the SABIC
between you and the side airbags; the performance curtains on both sides of the vehicle are deployed.
could be adversely affected and/or objects could NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
be pushed into you, causing serious injury. trim; but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and
rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy during
an impact severe enough to require airbag occupant
protection.
moderate to severe side collisions. In certain types of

WARNING!
collisions, both the front and side airbags may be trig-
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side gered. However, even in collisions where the airbags
Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stack work, you need the seat belts to keep you in the right
luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the position for the airbags to protect you properly.
location of the SABIC. The area where the side Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
curtain airbag is located should remain free from any risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
obstructions.
1. Children 12 years old and younger should always
ride buckled up in a rear seat.
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER ride
with seat belts and pretensioners, front airbags work with in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
driver and front passenger. Side airbags also work with infants in that position.
seat belts to improve occupant protection.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints should be
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is equipped, the positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should 4. If your vehicle has side airbags, do not lean against
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the space
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under between you and the door.
their arm.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
2
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child under If You Need Assistance in Section 9 of this
restraint. Refer to the section on Child Restraints. manual.
You should read the instructions provided with your
WARNING!
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
belts properly. severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be collisions, the airbags wont deploy at all. Always
moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags wear your seat belts even though you have airbags.
room to inflate.
impact sensors signals, a central electronic ORC deploys

WARNING!
the front airbags, side inflatable airbag curtains, side seat
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument thorax airbags, and front seat belt pretensioners as re-
panel during front airbag deployment could cause quired for each type of impact.
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START
the steering wheel or instrument panel. or ON position. These include all of the components
Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean listed above except the steering wheel and column,
against the door. Sit upright in the center of the instrument panel, and seat belt reminder light. If the key
seat. is in the OFF position, in the ACC position, or not in the
ignition, the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls
will deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warning
required for this vehicle.
light in the instrument panel for approximately
The ORC determines if a frontal or side collision is severe four to six seconds for a self-check when the
enough to require the airbags to inflate. Based on the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check,
the AIRBAG warning light will turn off. If the ORC Front and Side Impact Sensors
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns Impact Sensors trigger airbag deployment in front and
on the AIRBAG warning light, either momentarily or side impacts, and aid the ORC in determining appropri-
continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes ate response to impact events. Additional sensors in the 2
on again after initial start up. ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and
provide verification.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster AIRBAG warning light if a malfunction is Acceleration Sensors
noted. The diagnostics also record the nature of the Acceleration Sensors trigger airbag deployment based on
malfunction. dramatic acceleration change of the vehicle.
Pressure Sensors
WARNING!
Pressure Sensors trigger airbag deployment based on
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel door cavity pressure changes.
could mean you wont have the airbags to protect you Rollover Sensors
in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays on Rollover Sensors trigger airbag deployment in the event
after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you of vehicle rollover and aid the ORC in deploying Side
drive, have the airbag system checked right away. Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) for rollover events.
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain Turns on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
(SABIC) If Equipped the battery has power or until the ignition key is
The ORC deploys the SABIC during collision with other removed.
vehicles and during collisions where the impact is con-
Unlocks the doors automatically.
fined to a particular area of the vehicle such as
collisions with poles, trees or similar objects. If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the
It will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detect a moderate-
vehicle.
to-severe collision, to help restrain the driver, front
NOTE: The ORC does detect and protect for rollover passenger and rear passengers, and then immediately
when equipped with SABIC airbags. deflate.
Enhanced Accident Response System NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, and need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
the vehicle communication network intact, and the does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
power intact, the Enhanced Accident Response System system.
performs the following functions:
Cuts off fuel to the engine.
Flashes hazard lights.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
or all of the following may occur: see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturers instruc-
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
tions for cleaning. 2
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. WARNING!
However, if you havent healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
immediately. protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
Maintaining Your Airbag System

WARNING!
WARNING! Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced
airbag system. The airbag may inflate accidentally or
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
may not function properly if modifications are made.
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
be injured if the airbag system is not there to
advanced airbag system service. If your seat, includ-
protect you. Do not modify the components or
ing your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
in any way (including removal or loosening/
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer ap-
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
proved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
to modify an advanced airbag system for persons
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
NOTE: Perchlorate Material special handling may
apply. See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Airbag Light located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
You will want to have the airbags ready to proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
inflate for your protection in a collision. While fuse is good.
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
2
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
record up to approximately five seconds of specific
The AIRBAG light does not come on during the vehicle data parameters (see the following list) in an
approximately four to six seconds when the ignition event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag de-
switch is first turned ON. ployment, or near deployment, and up to a quarter-
second of high-speed deceleration data during and/or
The light remains on after the approximately four to
after airbag deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if
six-second interval.
an airbag deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise
The light comes on and remains on while driving. unavailable.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine NOTE:
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint 1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power). download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
more about the possible causes of crashes and associated
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. govern-
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
DaimlerChrysler Corporation, such investigations may
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
be requested by customers, insurance carriers, govern-
data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler
ment officials, and professional crash researchers, such as
Corporation to any third party except when:
those associated with universities, and with hospital and
insurance organizations. 1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative),
preserved.
the company or its designated representative will first
obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for 2. Used in defense of litigation involving a
the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before DaimlerChrysler Corporation product.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant. Impact acceleration and angle

4. Otherwise required by law. Seat belt status
Data Parameters That May Be Recorded: Brake status (service and parking brakes) 2
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
Engine control status (including engine speed)
airbag system
Transmission gear selection
Airbag disable light status (if equipped)
Cruise control status
Time of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage) Traction/stability control status
Airbag deployment level (if applicable) Tire pressure monitoring system status if equipped
Integrated Child Seat If Equipped To obtain Integrated Child Seat replacement instruc-
Operating instructions for the second row bench seat tions: Refer to Publication Order Forms at the back of this
with Integrated Child Seat are included with the seat. If manual and specify publication number 810168050.
the instructions are not with the seat or in the Owners
Child Restraints
Manual Package, replacement instruction can be ob-
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
tained.
times babies and children, too. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
Second Row Bench Seat With Integrated Child Seat

Safety experts recommend that children ride

WARNING!
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant 2
required to hold even an infant on your lap could carriers and convertible child seats. Both types of
become so great that you could not hold the child, no child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
matter how strong you are. The child and others shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your system. Refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil-
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the childs dren (LATCH) later in this section.
size. The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
Infants and Small Children used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
There are different sizes and types of restraints for vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
children from newborn size to the child almost large weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
seat owners manual to ensure you have the right seat for by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child. less than one year old.
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in Older Children and Child Restraints
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
injury or death to infants in this position. vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
Rearward-facing child seats and infant carriers must
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
NEVER be used while the second row Swivel n Go
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
seats are in the rearward-facing position.
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to Lower Anchors and
WARNING!
Tether for CHildren (LATCH) later in this section.
Never place any child seat or infant carrier in the An aftermarket belt-positioning booster seat is for chil-
Swivel n Go seat while it is in the rearward-facing dren weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still
position. The swivel seat should be locked in the too small to properly fit the vehicles seat belts. If the
forward position when using any child seat or infant child can not sit with knees bent over the vehicles seat
carriers, with the vehicle in motion. Failure to do so cushion while the childs back is against the seatback,
could result in serious injury or even death. they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped with a Check belt fit periodically. A childs squirming or
front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap slouching can move the belt out of position.
portion.)
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
Children Too Large For Booster Seats child closer to the center of the vehicle. If this doesnt
2
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt help, move the child to the center rear seating position
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend and use the lap belt. Never allow a child to put the
over the front of the seat when their back is against the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back.
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat. www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-SEATCHECK.
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
WARNING!
restraint:
Improper installation can lead to failure of an Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
collision. The child could be badly injured or Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
killed. Follow the manufacturers directions ex- that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
actly when installing an infant or child restraint. where you will use it, before you buy it.
A rearward-facing child restraint should only be The restraint must be appropriate for your childs
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re- weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy- weight and height limits.
ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant. Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
Occupants riding in Swivel n Go seating must be
not work when you need it.
wearing their seat belt and the seat must be locked
in either the forward or rearward position. Failure
to do so could result in serious injury or even
death.
The passenger seat belts are equipped with cinching around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
latch plates, which are designed to keep the lap portion again. If you still cant make the child restraint secure,
tight around the child restraint so that it is not neces- try a different seating position.
sary to use a locking clip. Pulling up on the shoulder
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
2
portion of the lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt.
restraint manufacturers directions.
The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight, how-
ever, any seat belt system will loosen with time, so When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary. vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Dont leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
cause serious personal injury.
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the Each vehicle, except commercial cargo vehicles, is
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate equipped with the child restraint anchorage system
into the buckle with the release button facing out. called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tether for CHildren. Two LATCH child restraint anchor-
If the belt still cant be tightened, or if pulling and
age systems are installed on all second-row seats and in
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the center position on all 3rd row fold-in-floor seats.
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
Second-row seats also feature tether strap anchorages,
located in the rear surface of the seatback. In addition, all

third row fold-in-floor seats are equipped with a child
restraint tether anchor at the center seating position.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting

When using the tether anchorages in the center position
on third row fold-in-floor seating, ensure that the strap is
LATCH Anchorages routed underneath the top of the seatback and the head
When using the tether anchorages in the outboard seat- restraint.
ing positions, ensure that the strap is routed underneath
the top of the seatback and the head restraint.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to

WARNING!
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
increased head motion and possible injury to the ages will continue to have features for installation in 2
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
strap. of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
Child restraint systems having attachments designed to install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection of reach of children. It is recommended that before
to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
older products. restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com- behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
patible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts. child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
your child unattended in the vehicle. tions that come with the child restraint system.
Installing the Child Restraint System
WARNING!
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many, Improper installation of a child restraint to the
but not all restraint systems will be equipped with LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the killed. Follow the manufacturers directions exactly
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some when installing an infant or child restraint.
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap. Transporting Pets
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach An unrestrained pet could be thrown about and possibly
the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the a collision.
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses

or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
REAR SEAT DELETE FEATURE (COMMERCIAL 2

VEHICLES ONLY) IF EQUIPPED
Commercial cargo vehicles are not designed for use as a
family vehicle and are not intended for carrying children
in the front passenger seat. However, if you must carry a
child in a vehicle without a rear seat, the passenger seat
should be moved to the full rearward position and the
child must be in a proper restraint system based on its
age, size and weight. NEVER carry a child in a rear facing
infant carrier in a vehicle without rear seats. In an Commercial Child Restraint Tether Anchor
accident, serious injury or death may occur from the This vehicle is equipped with a child restraint tether
deploying passenger airbag. anchor located on the lower rear of the front passenger
seat. Use this tether anchor to secure only forward
facing child restraints equipped with an upper tether
strap.
VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DE-

WARNING!
LETE FEATURE (Commercial Vehicles Only).
Rearward-facing infant restraints must never be se- The forward-facing child seat is for children from
cured in the passenger seat of a vehicle with a about 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and more than one year
passenger airbag. In an accident a passenger airbag old.
may deploy causing severe injury or death to infants
riding in rearward-facing infant restraints. A convertible child seat, one that is designed to be
used for children who are too heavy for a rearward-
facing infant seat, may be used IN THE FORWARD
Restraining Infants and Small Children with Seat FACING POSITION ONLY, IT MUST NEVER BE
Delete Feature (Commercial Vehicles Only) INSTALLED FACING TO THE REAR IN A VEHICLE
There are different sizes and types of restraints for EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DELETE FEA-
children from newborn size to the child almost large TURE (Commercial Vehicles Only). When a convert-
enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is ible seat is properly installed facing forward, the
correct for your child: vehicle seat should be adjusted to the rear most
position.
The rearward-facing infant carrier is for babies weigh-
ing up to about 20 lbs (9 kg), and less than one year
old. THIS TYPE OF SEAT CANNOT BE USED IN A
Children more than 40 lbs (18 kg) should be secured in 3. Route the tether strap under the head rest.
the passenger seat in a child restraint or belt-
NOTE: Ensure that the child restraint tether strap is
positioning booster seat with the seat adjusted to the
centered between the headrest supports underneath the
rear most position. Older children who do not use
head rest.
2
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled in the passenger seat 4. Using the hook attached to the child restraint tether
with the seat adjusted to the rear most position. Never strap, attach the child restraint tether strap to the metal
allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them anchor on the lower rear of the front passenger seat.
or under their arm.
5. Following the child seat manufacturers instructions,
Tether Installation For Commercial Vehicles With tighten the child restraint tether strap.
Rear Seat Delete
6. Inspect the tether anchor strap for nicks, abrasions,
To secure the child restraint upper tether strap to the
discoloration, and loose threads. If these, or any other
vehicle, follow the instructions shown:
condition that might effect the performance of the strap is
1. Locate the child restraint tether anchor on the lower observed, DO NOT USE. Contact your authorized
rear of the front passenger seat. DaimlerChrysler dealership for a replacement part.
2. Follow the child restraint manufacturers directions
for proper use of connecting the child restraint to the
extended tether strap.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

WARNING!
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
The vehicle tether anchor is designed to be used with your vehicle.
a child restraint only. It should not be used for any Drive moderately during the first 300 mi (500 km). After
other purpose. Before use, inspect the tether anchor the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
strap for nicks, abrasions, discoloration, and loose or 90 km/h) are desirable.
threads. If these or any other condition that might
effect the performance of the strap is observed, DO While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
NOT USE. Personal injury may result. Contact your limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
authorized DaimlerChrysler dealership for a replace- Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
ment part. mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
Maintenance Procedures in Section 7. NON-
DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST
NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few Airbag Light
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be The light should come on and remain on for four seconds
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned
interpreted as an indication of difficulty. ON. If the LED is not lit during starting and/or the light 2
stays on or comes ON while driving, have the system
SAFETY TIPS checked by an authorized dealer.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE INSIDE Defroster
THE VEHICLE Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
Seat Belts the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts, feel the air directed against the windshield.
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced NOTE: If the defroster is not working or you are unable
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. to feel air against the windshield in defrost mode, please
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a see your authorized dealer service center for repairs.
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE Exhaust Gas

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
WARNING!
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (includ- eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
ing spare) for proper pressure. follow the safety tips below.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
engine coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid, trans- outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
mission fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
WARNING!
If you are required to drive with the deck lid / liftgate

open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the 2
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Manual Rear View Day/Night Mirror Things You Should Know About Your
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 UConnect System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Hands-Free Communication (UConnect) Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Manual Front And Second Row Seat
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Stow n Go Seating If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 137
UConnect System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Swivel n Go Seating If Equipped . . . . . . . . 146
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Driver Memory Seat If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 153 Adjustable Pedals If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE Electronic Speed Control If Equipped . . . . . . 177
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Activating Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . 177
To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Overhead Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Hood Safety Switch If Equipped . . . . . . . . 158
Front Overhead Console If Equipped . . . . . 180
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Garage Door Opener If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 183
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Programming HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . . 188
Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Tilt Steering Column If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 169
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Rear Park Assist System If Equipped . . . . . . . 170
Power Sunroof If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Rear Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Power Sunroof Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Electrical Power Outlets If Equipped . . . . . . . 193 Door Trim Panel Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Power Inverter If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Driver Seatback Storage If Equipped . . . . . . 208
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . . 196 Second Row Floor Storage Bins
Sun Screens If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Removing The Floor Console With Stow n Go
3
Cup Holders And Convenience Tray Drawer . . . 198
Seating If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Instrument Panel Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Rear Compartment Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Interior Bottle Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Coat Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Smokers Package Kit If Equipped . . . . . . . . 199
Cargo Area Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 213
Basic Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Premium Console If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Umbrella Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Load-Leveling System If Equipped . . . . . . . . 216
Glove Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

MIRRORS Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the

small control under the mirror to the night position
Manual Rear View Day/Night Mirror If Equipped
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical adjustment of the mirror. Automatic Rear View Day/Night Mirror If
Equipped
When using this feature the mirror will automatically
adjust for annoying headlight glare from vehicles behind
you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the
button at the base of the mirror. A power indicator light
to the side on/off button will indicate when the dimming
feature is activated.
Manual Rearview Mirror

Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped

An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS 3
Side View Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror WARNING!
CAUTION! Vehicles and other objects seen in a outside convex
mirrors will look smaller and farther away than they
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never really are. Relying too much on side convex mirrors
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or
mirror clean. distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
Side View Manual Folding Mirrors Tilt In Reverse Feature Drivers Side View Mirror
All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either If Equipped
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have The Tilt in Reverse feature tilts the drivers outside
three detent positions; full forward, full rearward, and rearview mirror downward when the ignition switch is
normal. in the ON position and the transmission is in the RE-
VERSE position. This feature provides the driver with a
Drivers Auto-Dimming Side View Mirror If
better view of the ground and vehicle in the area of the
Equipped
rear tires when backing up. The mirror will move back to
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
its previous position when the transmission is shifted out
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn this feature
of REVERSE.
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
Rearview Mirror. Power Remote Folding Side View Mirrors If
Equipped
Press the power fold button to fold in the mirrors. Press
the button again to unfold the mirrors.
mirrors. Press the switch to the Left or Right for mirror

selection. Press the mirror select switch again to guard
against accidentally moving a mirror position. The mirror
selection will also automatically turn off after 30 seconds.
Power Folding Mirror Switch

Both mirrors will always move together and will fold
anytime the button is pressed. The ignition switch does
not have to be in the ON position.
Power Side Mirror Adjust
Power Remote Side View Mirrors If Equipped
1 - Left Mirror 3 - Adjusting Switch
Use the mirror select switch located on the drivers door 2 - Right Mirror
trim panel, to adjust the view obtained in the outside
Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for the 248-555-1212). Your cellular phones audio is trans-
direction you want the mirror to move. mitted through your vehicles audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
Drivers power mirror preselected positions can be con-
UConnect system.
trolled by the optional Driver Memory Seat Feature.
Refer to Driver Memory Seat If Equipped in Section NOTE: The UConnect system requires a cellular phone
3 of this manual. equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-Free Profile, Ver-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the UConnect website for
HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect) supported phones.
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: For UConnect customer support, visit the
NOTE: The sales code RER, REN and REU radios following websites:
contain an integrated Hands-Free Communication
(UConnect) system. Refer to your Navigation Users www.chrysler.com/uconnect
Manual for UConnect system operating instructions www.dodge.com/uconnect
for these radios.
www.jeep.com/uconnect
UConnect is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. UConnect allows you to dial a or call 18778558400
phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., Call Mike Work or Dial
UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your system at a time. The system is available in English,
vehicle and enables you to mute the systems microphone Spanish, or French languages.
for private conversation.
Phone Button
The UConnect phonebook enables you to store up to 32 The rearview mirror contains the microphone
names, with four numbers per name. Each language has for the system (depending on the type of
3
a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that mirror and radio equipped), and either the
language. This system is driven through your Bluetooth radio or the mirror has the two control buttons
Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect features (PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button)
Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables that will enable you to access the system.
different electronic devices to connect to each other
Voice Recognition Button
without wires or a docking station, so UConnect works
Actual button location may vary with radio.
no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be it your
The individual buttons are described in the
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is
Operation section.
turned on and has been paired to the vehicles
UConnect system. The UConnect system allows up to
seven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Only
The UConnect system can be used with any Hands-Free Operation

Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone. See the Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect
UConnect website for supported phones. If your cellu- system and to navigate through the UConnect menu
lar phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset structure. Voice commands are required after most
Profile) you may not be able to use any UConnect UConnect system prompts. You will be prompted for a
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the specific command and then guided through the available
phone manufacturer for details. options.
The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehi- Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
cles audio system. The volume of the UConnect system the beep, which follows the Ready prompt or another
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control prompt.
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
For certain operations, compound commands can be
switch), if so equipped.
used. For example, instead of saying Setup and then
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from Phone Pairing, the following compound command
the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on can be said: Setup Phone Pairing.
certain radios.
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com- Cancel Command
mand Phonebook New Entry, or you can break the At any prompt, after the beep, you can say Cancel and
combined form command into two voice commands: you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
Phonebook and New Entry. Please remember, the few instances the system will take you back to the
UConnect system works best when you talk in a previous menu.
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
Pair (Link) UConnect System to a Cellular Phone
3
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
To begin using your UConnect system, you must pair
Voice Command Tree your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone.
Refer to Voice Tree in this section.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
Help Command ence your cellular phone Owners Manual. The
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to UConnect website may also provide detailed instruc-
know your options at any prompt, say Help following tions for pairing.
the beep. The UConnect system will play all the options
The following are general phone to UConnect system
at any prompt if you ask for help.
pairing instructions:
To activate the UConnect system from idle, simply press
Press the PHONE button to begin.
the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect system sessions begin with a After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say
press of the PHONE button on the radio control head. Setup Phone Pairing.
When prompted, after the beep, say Pair a Phone and use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
follow the audible prompts. same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
cellular phone at any time (refer to Advanced Phone
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
Connectivity in this section).
after the initial pairing process.
Dial by Saying a Number
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect system a name for your cellular Press the PHONE button to begin.
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say
given a unique phone name.
Dial.
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
The system will prompt you to say the number you
priority level between 1 and 7, with 1 being the highest
want to call.
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect system. However, at any given time, For example, you can say 234-567-8901. The phone
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to number that you enter must be of valid length and
your UConnect system. The priority allows the combination. Based on the country in which the ve-
UConnect system to know which cellular phone to hicle was purchased, the UConnect system limits the
user from dialing an invalid combination of numbers. you can say John Doe, where John Doe is a previ-
For example, in the U.S., 234-567-890 is nine digits ously stored name entry in the UConnect phonebook.
long, which is not a valid U.S. phone number - the To learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer
closest valid phone number has 10 digits. to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook, in
this section.
The UConnect system will confirm the phone num-
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the The UConnect system will confirm the name and
3
display of certain radios. then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the phonebook is recom-
mended when the vehicle is not in motion.
Call.
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call. After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say
Phonebook New Entry.
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
long names helps the voice recognition and it is language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
recommended. For example, say Robert Smith or only in that language.
Robert instead of Bob.
Phonebook Download
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., UConnect allows the user to download entries from
Home, Work, Mobile, or Pager). This will allow their phone via Bluetooth. To use this feature, press the
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook PHONE button and say Phonebook Download. The
entry, if desired. system prompts, Ready to accept V card entry via
Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phone-
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth
phonebook entry that you are adding.
Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone- Owners Manual for specific instructions on how to send
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more these entries from your phone.
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
NOTE:
main menu.
The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX
The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth, entry that you wish to edit.
and you may see a message on the phone display that
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
the Bluetooth link is busy. In this case, the user must
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to
the UConnect system, and then send the address When prompted, recite the new phone number for the 3
book entry via Bluetooth. Please see your phone phonebook entry that you are editing.
Owners Manual for specific instructions on how to
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
drop the Bluetooth connection.
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
will only use the first 24 characters. to the main menu.
Edit Entries in the UConnect Phonebook Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
NOTE: Editing names in the phonebook is recom-
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mended when the vehicle is not in motion.
mobile and a home number, but you can add John
Press the PHONE button to begin. Does work number later using the Phonebook Edit
feature.
Phonebook Edit.
Delete Entries in the UConnect Phonebook After you enter the name, the UConnect system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you
when the vehicle is not in motion.
wish to delete.
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say language is deleted.
Phonebook Delete.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect Phonebook
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say
entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Phonebook Erase All.
Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
from the list, press the Voice Recognition button
while the UConnect system is playing the desired After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
entry and say Delete. deleted.
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook Phone Call Features

The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect system if the feature(s) are available on your
After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
Phonebook List Names. plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
The UConnect system will play the names of all the
accessed through the UConnect system. Check with 3
your cellular service provider for the features that you
phonebook entries.
have.
To call one of the names in the list, press the Voice
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Recognition button during the playing of the desired
Currently in Progress
name, and say Call.
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
NOTE: The user can also exercise Edit or Delete UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
operations at this point. tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject
The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the
the call, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
number designation you wish to call.
a single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
The selected number will be dialed. rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call to Toggling Between Calls in this section. To combine
Currently in Progress two calls, refer to Conference Call in this section.
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
phone. Press the PHONE button to place the current call
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
on hold and answer the incoming call.
PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
NOTE: The UConnect system compatible phones in
Toggling Between Calls
the market today do not support rejecting an incoming
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user
press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep,
can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
Making a Second Call While Current Call in have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
Progress time.
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
Conference Call
press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say
To initiate three-way calling, press the Voice Recogni- Redial.
tion button while a call is in progress, and make a
The UConnect system will call the last number that
second phone call, as described under Making a Second
was dialed from your cellular phone.
Call While Current Call in Progress. After the second call
has established, press and hold the PHONE button until NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the 3
you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls have UConnect system.
been joined into one conference call.
Call Continuation
Call Termination Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
continue on the UConnect system either until the call
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
cessation of the call on the UConnect system and
Redial transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
continue on the UConnect system for a certain dura- voice commands will be in that language.
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
NOTE: After every UConnect language change opera-
from the UConnect system to the mobile phone.
tion, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is
An active call is automatically transferred to the usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF. and usable across all languages.
UConnect System Features Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
Language Selection
reachable:
To change the language that the UConnect system is
using: Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
the name of the language you wish to switch to
follows:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say Towing Assistance
Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct If you need towing assistance:
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico. After the Ready prompt and the following beep, say
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
Towing Assistance. 3
country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
and Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may on the country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
not be applicable with the available cellular service and 2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
area. for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
City in Mexico).
The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell Please refer to the 24-Hour Towing Assistance cover-
phone directly. age details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on
the 24Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in Paging
emergency situations, when the cell phone has network To learn how to page, refer to Working with Automated
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system. Systems. Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can press
work properly with the UConnect system. the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you
wish to enter, followed by the word Send. For example,
Voice Mail Calling
if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to Working
4 6 #), you can press the Voice Recognition button and
with Automated Systems.
say, 3 7 4 6 # Send. Saying a number, or sequence of
Working with Automated Systems numbers, followed by Send, is also to be used for
This method is used in instances where one generally has navigating through an automated customer service cen-
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while ter menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can also send stored UConnect phonebook entries
You can use your UConnect system to access a voice as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
service or automated customer service line. Some ser- call and then press the Voice Recognition button and
vices require immediate response selection. In some say, Send. The system will prompt you to enter the
instances, that may be too quick for use of the UConnect name or number and say the name of the phonebook
system. entry you wish to send. The UConnect system will then
send the corresponding phone number associated with
When calling a number with your UConnect system
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
NOTE: Press the PHONE button to begin.

You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations; this is normal.
Setup Confirmations. The UConnect system will
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time play the current confirmation prompt status and you
out settings that are too short and may not allow the will be given the choice to change it.
use of this feature.
3
Phone and Network Status Indicators
Barge In - Overriding Prompts If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
The Voice Recognition button can be used when you such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice your cell phone, the UConnect system will provide
recognition command immediately. For example, if a notification to inform you of your phone and network
prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone, clear status when you are attempting to make a phone call
a, you could press the Voice Recognition button and using UConnect. The status is given for roaming, net-
say, Pair a Phone to select that option without having to work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system keypad and still use the UConnect system (while dial-
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect sys- ing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it). caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular Following the beep, say Mute.
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicles
In order to un-mute the UConnect system:
audio system. The UConnect system will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice recognition. Press the Voice Recognition button.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the Following the beep, say Mute off.
dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the
Advanced Phone Connectivity
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
may feel that the call did not go through even though the The UConnect system allows ongoing calls to be trans-
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system
hear the audio. without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute Off)
UConnect system or vice versa, press the Voice Recog-
When you mute the UConnect system, you will still be
nition button and say Transfer Call.
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect system:
Press the Voice Recognition button.
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the The UConnect system will play the phone names of
UConnect System and Cellular Phone all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different the lowest priority. To select or delete a paired
electronic devices, but can only be actively connected phone being announced, press the Voice Recogni-
with one electronic device at a time. tion button and say Select or Delete. Also, see the
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth
next two sections for an alternate way to select or 3
delete a paired phone.
connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone
and the UConnect system, follow the instructions de- Select Another Cellular Phone
scribed in your cellular phone Users Manual. This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the UConnect system.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts.
Setup Phone Pairing.
You can also press the Voice Recognition button at
When prompted, say List Phones.
any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone that you wish to select.
The selected phone will be used for the next phone Things You Should Know About Your UConnect
call. If the selected phone is not available, the System
UConnect system will return to using the highest
UConnect Tutorial
priority phone present in or near (approximately
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
within 30 ft [9 m]) the vehicle.
PHONE button and say UConnect Tutorial.
Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones
Voice Training
Press the PHONE button to begin. For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect
system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
Setup Phone Pairing.
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
At the next prompt, say Delete and follow the dures:
prompts.
From outside the UConnect mode (e.g., from radio
You can also press the Voice Recognition button at mode):
any time while the list is being played, and then
Press and hold the Voice Recognition button for five
choose the phone you wish to delete.
seconds until the session begins, or,
Press the Voice Recognition button and say the
Setup, Voice Training command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
UConnect system. For best results, the Voice Training speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked you.
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
blower fan switched OFF.
during a voice recognition period.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
3
Performance is maximized under:
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
low-to-medium blower setting,
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above low-to-medium vehicle speed,
procedure and follow the prompts.
low road noise,
Voice Recognition (VR)
smooth road surface,
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
fully closed windows,
provide at least 12 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror. dry weather condition.
Always wait for the beep before speaking. Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
When navigating through an automated system such In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of compromised with the convertible top down.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say Send.
Far End Audio Performance
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
Audio quality is maximized under:
not in motion is recommended.
low-to-medium blower setting,
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect phonebook. low-to-medium vehicle speed,
The UConnect phonebook nametag recognition rate low road noise,
is optimized for the person who stored the name in the
smooth road surface,
phonebook.
fully closed windows,
You can say O (letter O) for 0 (zero). 800 must be
spoken eight-zero-zero. dry weather conditions, and
Even though international dialing for most number operation from the drivers seat.
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness Bluetooth Communication Link
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
not the UConnect system. the UConnect system. When this happens, the connec-
tion can generally be re-established by switching the
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
in Bluetooth ON mode. 3
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
Power-Up
compromised with the convertible top down.
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must
wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
3
Voice Commands Voice Commands

Primary Alternate(s) Primary Alternate(s)
zero call
one cancel
two confirmation prompts 3
three continue
four delete
five dial
six download
seven edit
eight emergency
nine English
star (*) erase all
plus (+) Espanol
pound (#) Francais
add location help
all home
Voice Commands Voice Commands

Primary Alternate(s) Primary Alternate(s)
language return to main menu return or main menu
list names select phone select
list phones send
mobile set up phone settings or phone
mute set up
mute off towing assistance
new entry transfer call
no UConnect Tutorial
pager try again
pair a phone voice training
phone pairing pairing work
phonebook phone book yes
previous
record again
redial
General Information SEATS

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the (protection) System of the vehicle. They need to be used
following conditions: properly for safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING! 3
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op- DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your
eration. vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Front And Second Row Seat Adjuster Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
The adjusting bar is located under the front of the seat. seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
Pull the bar up and move the seat to the desired position.
Release the bar to lock the seat into position. WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is

dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
8Way Drivers Power Seat If Equipped

The drivers power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the seat. The front switch controls
up/down, forward/rearward, and tilt adjustment. The
Manual Seat Adjuster rear switch controls the seatback recline adjustment.
CAUTION!
DO NOT place any article under a power seat or

impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seats 3
path.
Adjustable Head Restraints

Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
Driver Power Seat Switch on the head restraint cushion so that the upper edge is as
1 - Bottom Control 2 - Seatback Control high as practical. To raise the head restraint, pull up on
the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, depress
the release tab located at the base of the head restraint
and push down on the head restraint.
Heated Seats If Equipped

This feature heats the front driver and
passenger seats. The controls for front
heated seats are located on the center
instrument panel area. The switch in-
dicator lights will show when the
HIGH or LOW heat is ON. Press the
switch once to choose HIGH (two
lights), press it a second time to choose LOW (one light),
press it a third time for No Heat (no lights).
Second row heated seat switches are located in the
Adjusting The Head Restraint Cushion sliding side door handle trim panels and function the
same as front switches.
1 - Removal Release 2 - Lowering Release
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care 3
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. DO NOT place anything on the seat
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Sliding Door Controls
1 - Heated Seat Switch 4 - Door Handle Manual Reclining Seats If Equipped
2 - Power Window Switch 5 - Power Sliding Door Switch
3 - Manual Lock
The recliner mechanism control is on the outboard side of
the seat. To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever,
then push back to the desired position and release the
lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the
seatback to its normal position. Using body pressure, lean

WARNING!
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback
has latched. DO NOT ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Reclining Seat Control

Manual Lumbar Adjust Lever If Equipped Stow n Go Seating If Equipped

The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the outboard On vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating, the
side of the seat. To increase the support, rotate the handle second and third row seats may be folded into the floor
down. To decrease the support, rotate the handle upwards. for convenient storage.
To Fold Second Row Seats
3
1. Move the front seat fully forward.
2. Lower the head restraints and raise the armrests on the
second row seat.
Manual Lumbar Control

3. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the un-

locked position and then pull up on the storage bin latch
to open the cover.
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release
1 - Bin Latch 3 - Seatback Release

2 - Storage Pocket
4. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever located on the 5. Pull rearward on the release strap located at the rear of
outboard side of the seat and fold the seatback down. To the seat and tumble the seat forward into the storage bin.
assure the seatback is latched in the folded position,
additional downward pressure on the seatback may be
required when folding.
3
Second Row Seat Release Strap

6. Close the storage bin cover and slide the storage bin
locking mechanism to the locked position.
Second Row Seatback Release Lever
To Unfold Second Row Seats

CAUTION!
1. Slide the storage bin locking mechanism to the un-
The storage bin cover must be locked and flat to locked position and then pull up on the storage bin latch
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks, to open the cover.
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
2. Pull up on the handle to lift the seat out of the storage
bin and push the seat rearward to latch the seat anchors.
WARNING!
In an accident, serious injury could result if the seat

storage bin covers are not properly latched.
DO NOT drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
DO NOT use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
Second Row Seat Release Handle

3. Pull up on the seatback recliner lever located on the Second Row Bench Seat If Equipped
outboard side of the seat, to return the seatback to its full While the bench seat does not stow in the floor, it is
upright position. removable for added cargo space. Rollers integrated into
the seat frame ease removal through the rear. Floor
storage compartments are still available with the bench
seat. 3
Third Row Power Seat If Equipped
The third row power seat offers the following features:
The seatbacks can be folded forward for additional
cargo space if needed
Head restraints can be stowed with the seat
Tailgate mode flips the seat rearward to face out the
tailgate.
Second Row Seatback Release Lever
4. Close the storage bin cover and adjust the head
restraint to the desired position.
The power recline feature, located on the side of the seat Remote Third Row Power Seat Switch If
cushion, adjusts the seatback angle forward/rearward Equipped
for occupant comfort A One-Touch Third Row Power Folding Seat switch is
located in the left rear trim panel as part of a switch-bank.
Third Row Power Seat Switch

One Touch Folding Seat Third Row
The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding and
unfolding positions for the third row seats.
Left and right third row seats can be folded individually NOTE: The Third Row Power Seat system includes
or together. The One Touch Third Row Power Folding obstacle detection for safe operation. When the system
Seat adjusts to the following positions using the switch detects an obstacle, the motors will stop and reverse the
bank located on the left rear trim panel: motion for a brief period. Should this occur, remove the
obstacle and repress the button again, for the desired
position. 3
To Fold Third Row Seats Manually If Equipped
1. Lower the head restraint to its full down position.
2. Pull release strap marked 1 located on the rear of the
seat to lower the seatback.
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank

1 Open to Normal 4 Fold Flat
2 Stow 5 Right/Left or Both Seats
3 Tailgate
3. Pull release strap marked 2 to release the anchors. To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out of the
storage bin and push the seat forward until the anchors
latch.
2. Pull release strap marked 1 to unlock the recliner.
3. Pulling strap 3 releases the seatback to return to its
full upright position.
4. Adjust the head restraint to the desired position.
WARNING!
Folding Third Row Seat Strap In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be
4. Pull release strap marked 3 and tumble the seat injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
rearward into the storage bin. attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Tailgate Mode 2. To restore the seat to its upright position, lift up on the
seatback and push forward until the anchors latch.
1. Pull release strap 2, then pull release strap 3 to
rotate the entire seat rearward.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death, NEVER operate the 3

vehicle with occupants in the third row seat while in
the tailgate mode.
Easy Access Seating

The second row Stow n Go seats can be tilted forward for
easy access to the third row seat or rear cargo area.
To tilt the seat, pull forward on the release strap located
on the front of the seat between the seatback and seat
Tailgate Positioning Release Straps 2 and 3 cushion and tilt the seat fully forward.
To return the seat to its upright position, push rearward

WARNING!
on the seatback until it latches. Always ensure that it is
fully latched. In the event of a collision you could be injured if the
seat is not fully latched.
Swivel n Go Seating If Equipped

Premium second row Swivel n Go Seating features
include:
A table that installs between the second and third row
seats. The table disassembles and stows in the hidden
second row floor storage bin
Seats rotate to face forward or rearward
Tilting Second Row Stow n Go Seat Seat belts are integrated into the swivel seats
Dual folding armrests
A side storage pocket that will accommodate a phone To swivel the seat: Pull the lower handle on the outboard
or hand-held game side of the seat and push the side of the seatback to begin
rotation. Once the seat begins to rotate, the handle may
Seats are removable
be released. The seat locks in position once reaching the
forward or rearward positions only.
Seatbacks fold forward on an angle, not flat. This allows
3
the seats to swivel when the seatbacks are folded.
Swivel n Go Seating Features

1 - Seat Release 4 - Seatback Release
2 - Fore-Aft Adjustment 5 - Moveable Armrest
3 - Swivel Release
Removing Swivel n Go Seating If Equipped

WARNING!
1. Remove any obstructions from the floor behind the
Failure to comply with the following conditions seat, and stow the Third Row Seat.
could result in serious injury or even death.
2. Pull up on the release bar located at the bottom front
NEVER place any child seat or infant carrier in the edge of the swivel seat.
Swivel n Go seat while it is in the rearward facing
position. 3. From behind the seat, lift up on the rear of the seat
cushion while pulling the seat in a rearward direction.
The swivel seat should be locked in the forward
position when using any child seat or infant 4. Remove the seat from vehicle through the liftgate.
carriers, with the vehicle in motion. Rollers are part of the seat frame and will ease the
removal process.
Occupants riding in Swivel n Go seating, must be
wearing their seat belt and the seat must be locked 5. Lower the release handle located at the bottom front
in either the forward or rearward position. edge of the seat.
Make sure the Swivel n Go seat is in a locked Each seat weighs about 90 lbs. (81 kg).
position with the handle down. Test the seat after
it is locked to see that it doesnt swivel.
NOTE: Electrical contacts for the available heated seats Swivel n Go Seating Table If Equipped
automatically disengage or engage as the seat is removed The Swivel n Go Seating Table consists of an easily
or installed. The contacts slide past each other as the seat assembled post and top.
is rolled to and from the strikers.
When reinstalling the seat, make certain to lower the
release handle to ensure the seat is latched securely.
3
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle could be

injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Second Row Seating and Table

The table and leg are stored beneath the floor when not in 3. Remove the pole and table top by loosening the hook
use. To install the table follow these steps: and loop straps.
1. Swivel the second row seats so they are facing the rear. 4. Insert pole into base by aligning the lock button into
notch of the base.
2. Open the floor storage cover in front of the second row
seats.
Installing Table Leg Into Base

1 - Table Base 2 - Lock/Release Button
Table and Leg Storage
5. Twist the pole in a clockwise rotation until it stops.

WARNING!
Note: You will hear an audible click when the lock
button engages the base. Failure to comply with the following conditions
6. Place the table top over the installed pole aligning could result in serious injury or even death.
with the mating feature of the underside of the table top. DO NOT install the table while vehicle is in
Apply pressure on the table top and press downward.
3
motion
Note: You will hear an audible click when the table
NEVER drive the vehicle with only the pole in-
latch engages the pole.
stalled
DO NOT place heavy or sharp objects on table.
DO NOT place liquid drinks on the table, use
available cup holders.
Second Row seats must be locked in the rearward
facing position before installing the table.
To separate the table top from the pole, follow these 3. While pulling on the latch, pull upward to remove the
steps: table top from the pole.
1. Locate the release latch on the underside of the table NOTE: The table top should be removed from the leg
top. prior to removing the leg from its mounting base.
4. Locate the release button on the pole. Press the release
button firmly to activate the release from the base.
5. While pressing the release button, twist the pole in a
counterclockwise rotation until it stops. Pull upward to
remove the pole from the base.
6. Place the pole on the underside of the table top and
secure with the hook and loop straps.
7. Once the pole and table top are secured, you may
place them in the floor storage bin in front of the second
row seats.
Table Top Release
NOTE: Always store the table and pole in the floor
2. Pull horizontally on the latch to activate the release storage bin when not in use.
from the pole.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainer Hooks

Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the seatbacks of all rear seats and
some front seats. The floor supports the partial weight of
the bagged goods.
3
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED
Once programmed, the Memory Buttons 1 and 2 on the
drivers door panel can be used to recall the drivers seat,
drivers outside mirror, adjustable brake and accelerator
pedals, and radio station preset settings. Your Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be pro-
grammed to recall the same positions when the UN- Driver Memory Seat Switch
LOCK button is pressed. Your vehicle may have been delivered with two Remote
Keyless Entry transmitters. One or both transmitters can
be linked to either Memory Position. The memory system
can accommodate up to four transmitters, each one
linked to either of the two memory positions.
Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE 5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
Transmitter To Memory to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set).
NOTE: Each time the SET(S) button and a numbered 6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
button (1 or 2) are pressed, you erase the memory settings remove the key.
for that button and store a new one.
7. Press and release the SET(S) button located on the
1. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to drivers door. A chime will sound signaling that you are
the ON position. in the memory set mode.
2. Press the driver door Memory Buttons number 1 if 8. Within five seconds, press and release Memory Button
you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button 1 or 2 on the drivers door. A chime will sound signaling
number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The to you that the driver memory has been set. The next step
system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system must be performed within five seconds if you desire to
to complete the memory recall before continuing to step also use a Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to recall
3. memory positions.
3. Adjust the drivers seat, recliner, and drivers side- 9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the
view mirror to the desired positions. transmitters. A chime will sound signaling to you that the
transmitter has been successfully linked to memory.
4. Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired
positions.
10. Insert the ignition key and turn the ignition switch to To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
the ON position. Memory Button 1 on the drivers door or the UNLOCK
button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to
11. Select Remote Linked to Memory in the Electronic
Memory Position 1.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter Yes or
select No from the EVIC and enter Yes. Refer to the To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
Customer Programmable features in the Electronic Ve- Memory Button 2 on the drivers door or the UNLOCK
3
hicle Information Center (EVIC) section for more infor- button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter linked to
mation. Memory Position 2.
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next Memory A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the memory
Position using the other numbered Memory Button or to buttons on the drivers door during a recall (S, 1, or 2).
link another Remote Keyless Entry transmitter to When a recall is cancelled, the drivers seat, drivers
memory. mirror, and the pedals stop moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory To disable another transmitter linked to either Memory
Position, repeat steps 1 to 5 for each transmitter.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key. NOTE: Once programmed, all transmitters linked to
memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
2. Press and release Memory Button 1. The system will
Refer to the Remote Linked to Memory Customer Pro-
recall any memory settings stored in position 1. Wait for
grammable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
the system to complete the memory recall before continu-
tion Center (EVIC) for more information.
ing to step 3.
3. Press and release the memory SET(S) button located TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
on the drivers door. A chime will sound signaling that To open the hood, two latches must be released.
you are in the memory set mode. 1. Pull the hood release lever located on the instrument
4. Within five seconds, press and release Memory Button panel, below the steering column.
1 on the drivers door. A chime will sound signaling to 2. Move to the front of the vehicle and look inside the
you that the driver memory has been set. center of the hood opening. Locate then push the safety
5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK catch lever to the right while raising the hood at the same
button on the Remote Keyless Entry transmitter. A chime time.
will sound signaling to you that the transmitter link has
been successfully disabled.
Hood Release Front View Hood Safety Catch

Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to HOOD SAFETY SWITCH IF EQUIPPED
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 12 If the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
in (30 cm) and then drop it. This should secure both Information Center (EVIC), and the hood is not latched,
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully the EVIC will display Hood Ajar in the instrument
closed, with both latches engaged. cluster EVIC display window.
If the vehicle is equipped with the Compass Mini-Trip
WARNING!
Computer (CMTC) and the hood is not latched, a hood
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when will be displayed in the PRNDL/Odometer window of
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision. the instrument cluster.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
LIGHTS Interior Lighting

All of the lights, except the hazard warning lights, Interior lights are turned on when a door or liftgate is
headlamp high beams and flash to pass, are controlled by opened, the keyless entry transmitter is activated, or
switches to the left of the steering column on the instru- when the dimmer control is moved to the extreme top.
ment panel.
The interior lights will automatically turn off in about 10
minutes for the first activation and 90 seconds every
3
activation thereafter until the engine is started, if one of
the following occur:
A door, sliding door or the liftgate is left open
Any overhead reading light is left on
If the dimmer control is in the extreme top position
NOTE: The key must be out of the ignition switch or the
ignition switch must be in the OFF position for this
feature to operate.
Headlight Switch Assembly
Dome Light Positions Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)

Rotate the dimmer control completely Rotate the dimmer control to the first
upward to the second detent (extreme detent. This feature brightens the
top position) to turn on the interior odometer, radio and overhead dis-
lights, except the front reading/ plays when the park lights or head-
courtesy lights. The interior lights will lights are on.
remain on when the dimmer control is
in this position.
Dimmer Control
Interior Lighting Defeat (Off)
With the park lights or headlights on,
Rotate the dimmer control to the off
rotating the dimmer control for the
position (extreme bottom). The inte-
interior lights on the instrument panel
rior lights will remain off when the
upward will increase the brightness of
doors or liftgate are open.
the instrument panel lights.
HALO Lights If Equipped Daytime Running Lights (Canada/Fleet Vehicles

Halo Lights are strategically-placed, soft lighting that Only)
helps to illuminate specific areas to aid the occupants in The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
locating specific features while driving at night. engine is started and the transmission is in any gear
except PARK. This provides a constant lights on condi-
To activate the Halo lights, push in on the Halo
switch located below the dimmer control.
tion until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate 3
at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking brake
Pressing the switch in a second time, will turn
is applied the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn
the Halo lights off.
off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the
Exterior Lights same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of
the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no
Parking Lights
longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
Turn the headlight switch knob to the first detent
to turn the park lights on. This also turns on all Headlights
instrument panel lighting. Turn the headlight switch knob to the 2nd detent
to turn the headlights and park lights on. This
also turns on all instrument panel lighting.
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,

rotate the dimmer control up or down.
Automatic Headlights If Equipped

This system automatically turns your headlights on or off
based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn
the headlight switch to the extreme counterclockwise
position aligning the indicator with the A on the
headlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight
Time Delay feature is also on. This means your headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
ignition switch OFF. To turn the Automatic System off,
turn the headlight switch clockwise to the O off
position.
Automatic Headlights
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the Automatic mode.
Headlights On with Wipers If Equipped The driver can choose, when exiting the vehicle, to have
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights it the headlights remain on for 30, 60, or 90 seconds, or not
also has this customer programmable feature. When your remain on. To change the timer setting see your autho-
headlights are in the automatic mode, and the engine is rized Dealer.
running, the headlights will automatically turn on when
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition, they
the wiper system is on.
will turn off in the normal manner.
3
Headlight Delay If Equipped
NOTE: The headlights must be turned off within 45
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this
for up to 90 seconds after exiting your vehicle.
feature.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The 90 second delay inter-
val begins when headlight switch is turned off. If the
headlights or park lights are turned back on or the
ignition switch is turned on, the delay will be cancelled.
Front Fog Lights If Equipped Lights-On Reminder

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the park If the headlights or the park lights are left on, or if the
lights or the low beam headlights and push in the dimmer control is in the extreme top position after the
headlight switch control knob. Pressing the head- ignition switch is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
light switch control knob in a second time, will turn the the drivers door is opened.
front fog lights off.
Battery Protection
This feature provides battery protection to avoid wearing
down the battery if the headlights, park lights, or front
fog lights are left on for extended periods of time when
the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. After eight
minutes of the ignition switch being in the LOCK posi-
tion and the headlight switch in any position other than
OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off automatically until
the next cycle of the ignition switch or headlight switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if the
ignition switch is turned to any other position other than
LOCK during the three minute delay.
Fog Light Switch
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check for a

The multifunction control lever is located on the left side defective outside turn signal light bulb. If one of the
of the steering column. indicators fails to light when the lever is moved, it would
suggest that the indicator light is defective.
The Multifunction Lever assembly controls:
You may manually signal a lane change by moving the
Turn Signals
lever partially up or down.
3
Headlight Low and High Beams
Flash-to-Pass (Optical Horn)
Front and Rear Wiper And Washer Functions
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down to signal a
right-hand or left-hand turn.
The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes
to indicate the direction of the turn, and proper operation
of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Turn Signal Switch

Turn Signal Auto-Mode

Tap the multifunction control lever once and the turn
signal (left or right) will flash three times, and automati-
cally turn off.
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled at over 18 mph (29 km/h) for about 1 mi (1.6
km) with the turn signals on, a chime will sound to alert
the driver.
Windshield Wiper and Washer Functions
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch within
the multifunction lever. Rotate the end of the lever to Multifunction Lever Features
select the desired wiper speed. 1 - Front Mist/Washer 3 - Rear Wiper/Washer
2 - Wiper Speeds 4 - Low/High Beam and Flash
NOTE: Always remove any buildup of snow that pre-
vents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the 1. Multifunction Lever Mist, Front Wiper and
off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off Washer
and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage Press the end of the multifunction lever inward to the
to the wiper motor may occur. first detent and release to clear the windshield. Pressing
the multifunction lever inward to the second detent will between cycles, to a cycle every 2 seconds. The time delay
cause the washers to spray for a maximum of 10 seconds, will be doubled if the vehicle speed is less than 10 mph
or until the lever is released, and the wipers will cycle (16 km/h).
three times.
Low Speed is achieved by rotating the multifunction
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is depressed while in lever past the intermittent settings, to the first detent.
the delay range, the wipers will operate for several
3
High Speed is achieved by rotating the multifunction
seconds after the lever is released, and then resume the
lever past the intermittent settings, to the second detent.
intermittent interval previously selected.
3. Rotary Ring Rear Wiper and Washer
If the multifunction lever is depressed while in the off
Rotating the rotary ring to the first detent activates the
position, the wipers will operate for approximately two
rear intermittent wipers. To activate the washers, rotate
wipe cycles and automatically turn off.
the rotary ring fully forward and the washers will spray
2. Intermittent, Low and High Speed Wipers until the ring is released, and then resume the intermit-
Use the intermittent wipers when weather conditions tent interval.
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-
NOTE: Rear window wipers function in the intermittent
tween cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
wiper speed only.
tion lever to the first detent position, then turn the end of
the lever to select the desired delay interval. The delay
can be regulated from a maximum of about 20 seconds
4. Headlight Low/High Beam Select Switch and

WARNING!
Flash-to-Pass
Headlight Low/High Beam Select Switch When the Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
headlights are turned on, pushing the lever assembly could lead to an accident. You might not see other
toward the instrument panel will switch from low beams vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
to high beams. Pulling back to the neutral position the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
returns to low beam headlights. windshield with defroster before and during wind-
Flash-to-Pass (Optical Horn) You can signal another shield washer use.
vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the mul-
tifunction lever toward you. This will cause the head-
lights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the Headlights On When Wipers Are On If
lever is released. Equipped
Headlights on when windshield wipers are on may be
found on vehicles equipped with automatic headlight
system. Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter (EVIC) in Section 4 under PERSONAL SETTINGS
(CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES) for more
information.
TILT STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED

To tilt the column, pull the small lever downward
(located on the steering column and below the steering
wheel) to the open position. You may then position the
steering wheel up or down, as desired. Pull the small
lever upward to the closed position to lock the steering 3
wheel firmly in place.
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is

moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have Tilt Steering Column Control
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED NOTE: The system will be active until the vehicle speed
The Rear Park Assist System provides visual and audible is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
indications of the distance between the rear fascia and the above. The system will be active again if the vehicle
detected obstacle when backing up. When backing up the speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 10
driver should also use the inside rearview and outside mph (16 km/h).
mirrors.
Rear Park Assist Sensors
The Rear Park Assist System will remember the last The four Rear Park Assist Sensors, located in the rear
system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition fascia, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
cycle when the ignition is changed to the RUN/ON the sensors field of view. The monitored area seems oval
position. in shape. The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-
mately 11.8 in (30 cm) up to 78.7 in (200 cm) from the rear
The Rear Park Assist System can be active only when the
fascia in the horizontal direction, depending on the
transaxle gear selector lever is in REVERSE. When in
location and orientation of the obstacle and the type of
REVERSE, the system scans for objects behind the vehicle
obstacle.
using four sensors located in the rear bumper.
Rear Park Assist Warning Display When the ignition switch is turned to the RUN/ON
The Rear Park Assist Warning Display, located in the position, the warning display will turn on all of its LEDs
headliner near the liftgate glass, provides both visual and for about one second. Each side of the warning display
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the has six yellow and two red LED lights, one set to warn of
rear fascia and the detected obstacle. obstacles behind the left rear of the vehicle and the other
set to warn of obstacles behind the right rear of the 3
vehicle. The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the red
LED is illuminated.
The driver can view the LEDs either through the rear-
view mirror or by looking directly at the display above
the rear window.
The system dimly illuminates the two outer most yellow
LEDs when it is on and detects no obstacles. The follow-
ing chart shows the warning display operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle.
Rear Park Assist LED Lights

PARK ASSIST WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES

DISPLAY LED OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM: AUDIBLE SIGNAL
REAR CENTER
REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER
1st LED 78.7 in (200 cm) Yellow Yes, Half Second
2nd LED 51.1 in (130 cm) Yellow None
3rd LED 45.2 in (115 cm) Yellow None
4th LED 31.5 in (80 cm) 39.3 in (100 cm) Yellow None
5th LED 25.5 in (65 cm) 33.5 in (85 cm) Yellow None
6th LED 20 in (50 cm) 27.6 in (70 cm) Yellow None
7th LED 16 in (40 cm) 19.7 in (50 cm) Red at 12 in (30 cm)
Intermittent
8th LED 6 in (15 cm) 11.81 in (30 cm) Red at 8 in (20 cm)
Continuous
NOTE: The Rear Park Assist System will MUTE the radio, if on, when the audible warning is activated.
WARNING! CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when To avoid vehicle damage the Rear Park Assist
using the Rear Park Assist System. Always check care- System should only be used as a parking aid and
fully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for is unable to recognize every obstacle, including
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
small objects. Parking curbs might be temporarily 3
spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety
of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious above or below the sensors will not be detected
injury or death. when they are in close proximity to the rear of the
Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is strongly vehicle.
recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be
be disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not driven slowly when using the Rear Park Assist
used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
System to be able to stop in time when an obstacle
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will
be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when is detected. It is recommended that the driver look
the warning display turns the red LEDs on. Also, the over his/her shoulder when using the Rear Park
sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem- Assist System.
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
NOTE: (Customer Programmable Features) under Electronic

Ensure that the rear bumper is free of dirt and debris Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in Section 4 of this
to keep the system operating properly. manual.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could Vehicles Equipped With the Compass Mini-Trip
affect the performance of the system. Computer (CMTC)
You can turn the Rear Park Assist System ON or OFF
Enabling and Disassembling The Rear Park Assist
through the CMTC by pressing the left reset button in the
System
instrument cluster. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
There are times when you may want to disable the Rear
position, then press and hold the rest button for approxi-
Park Assist System, such as when towing a trailer.
mately two seconds.
NOTE: The manufacturer suggests disabling the Rear
Service The Rear Park Assist System
Park Assist System when towing a trailer. Refer to the
If the Rear Park Assist System malfunctions, the instru-
following procedures.
ment cluster will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
Vehicles Equipped With the Electronic Vehicle cycle, and it will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST
Information Center (EVIC) SYSTEM message. Refer to Compass Mini Trip Com-
You can turn the Rear Park Assist System on or off puter (CMTC) or Electronic Vehicle Information Center
through the EVIC. For details, refer to Personal Settings (EVIC) as equipped, in Section 4 of this manual.
If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), after mak- This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedals to
ing sure the rear bumper is clean, please see your move toward or away from the driver to provide improved
authorized dealer. position with the steering wheel. The adjustable pedal
system is designed to allow a greater range of driver
Should this wrench symbol display with the
letter P next to it, your Park Sense System
comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat positions. The 3
switch is located on the left side of the steering column.
needs servicing. Contact your authorized
dealer.
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System
Clean the Rear Park Assist Sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do
not scratch or poke the sensors, otherwise, you could
damage the sensors.
Adjustable Pedal Switch

Press the button forward to move the pedals forward

CAUTION!
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the button rearward to move the pedals rearward Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
(toward the driver). or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF. ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
The pedals can be adjusted while driving. adjustable pedals path.
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys-
tem is ON. The following messages will be displayed
on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In-
formation System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to
be adjusted when the system is locked out (Adjust-
able Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or
Adjustable Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse).
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Activating Electronic Speed Control

When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator Push the ON/OFF button (located in the end of the lever)
operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). once and the CRUISE indicator light (located in the
message window of the odometer) will illuminate show-
ing the electronic speed control system is on. To turn the
system OFF, push the ON/OFF button again and the 3
system and indicator will turn off.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on

when not in use is dangerous. You could accidently
SET the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you arent using it.
Electronic Speed Control Switches
Setting Electronic Speed Control at a Desired Varying The Speed Setting

Speed When the speed control is SET, speed can be increased by
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press raising and holding the RESUME/ACCEL lever up-
the SET lever downward and then release. Lift your foot wards. When released, a new set speed will be estab-
off the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the lished.
selected speed.
Raising the lever RESUME/ACCEL upwards once will
Deactivating Electronic Speed Control result in a 1 mph (1 km/h) speed increase. Each time the
A soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the lever lever is tapped upwards, speed increases so that tapping
CANCEL toward you, will deactivate the speed control the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph (5
without erasing the set speed memory. Pushing the km/h), etc.
ON/OFF button to the OFF position or turning OFF the
To decrease speed while speed control is SET, press the
ignition erases the set speed memory.
lever SET/DECEL downward and hold. Release the lever
Resuming Speed when the desired speed is reached, and the new speed
To resume a previously set speed, raise the lever will be SET.
RESUME/ACCEL upwards and release. Resume can be
Tapping the lever SET/DECEL downward once will
used at any speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
result in a 1 mph (1 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the
lever is tapped downward, speed decreases.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system has been On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure
proper operation. If this occurs, the system can be WARNING!
reactivated by pushing the speed control switch ON/
OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle SET speed. Speed Control can be dangerous where the system 3
cant maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
Accelerating To Pass go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the control. An accident could be the result. Dont use
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
Your vehicle may experience a downshift (automatic
transmissions only) while climbing uphill or descending
downhill. This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle
set speed.
OVERHEAD CONSOLES
Front Overhead Console If Equipped
Two versions of the overhead console are available. The
base front overhead console models feature fixed incan-
descent courtesy/reading lights, flip-down sunglass stor-
age and conversation mirror.
Premium front overhead console models feature an LED
focused light that illuminates the instrument panel cup
holders, Infrared Automatic Temperature Control Sensor
(ATC equipped only), two swiveling LED lights, flip-
down sunglass storage, conversation mirror, optional
power sliding door switches and an optional power Front Premium Overhead Console Features
liftgate switch. 1 - Cupholder LED 4 - Storage/Mirror
2 - ATC Sensor 5 - Switch Bank
3 - Interior Lights
Courtesy/Interior Lighting Sunglass Storage

At the forward end of the console are two courtesy lights At the rear of the front overhead console, a compartment
(standard dome light has two buttons). The lights turn on is provided for the storage of two pairs of sunglasses.
when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is opened.
Press the door latch to open the compartment. The door
If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry,
will slowly rotate to an open position.
the lights will also turn on when the unlock button on the 3
transmitter is pressed. NOTE: The front overhead console used with factory
sunroof incorporates a sunroof switch.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the Rear Overhead Consoles If Equipped
vehicle. Press a second time to turn the each light off. You The rear overhead storage system is available in two
may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the versions: with or without sunroof.
outside ring which is identified with four directional
An additional LED at the front of the rear console shines
arrows.
down on the second row footwell area while in courtesy
The area around the instrument panel cupholders is also mode, for added convenience.
illuminated from a light in the overhead console. This
light is turned on when the headlight switch is on and
will adjust in brightness when the dimmer control is
rotated up or down.
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights If Equipped

The overhead console had two sets of courtesy lights. The
lights turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the
liftgate is opened. If your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry, the lights will also turn on when
the unlock button on the transmitter is pressed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press
in on each lens to turn these lights on while inside the
vehicle. Press a second time to turn the each light off. You
may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the
outside ring which is identified with four directional
Overhead Compartment Features arrows.
1 DVD 1 5 Storage Rear Console Halo Lighting If Equipped
2 Rear HVAC 6 DVD 1 The rear overhead console features recessed halo lighting
3 Interior Lights 7 Interior Lights
4 Storage 8 Halo Lighting around the perimeter of the console base. This feature
1
If equipped, otherwise storage. provides additional lighting options while traveling and
is controlled by the headlight switch. Refer to Halo
Lighting - If Equipped under Lighting in Under-

standing The Features Of Your Vehicle in Section 3.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage 3
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicles
battery.
The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink
channels.
HomeLink Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
WARNING! WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver ous injury or death.
with a garage door opener that has a stop and
reverse feature as required by Federal safety stan-
dards. This includes most garage door opener models PROGRAMMING HOMELINK
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door Before You Begin
opener without these safety features. Call toll-free If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons,
18003553515 or, on the Internet at erase all channels before you begin training.
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance. To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.
when programming. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds, or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
Begin Programming
open and close while you train.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
2. Hold the battery side of the hand-held transmitter may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
3
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program. in the Gate Operator/Canadian Programming section.
Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) away NOTE: After training a HomeLink channel, if the
from the HomeLink button you wish to program while garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the
keeping the indicator light in view. garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
proceed to Step 5 Programming A Rolling Code Sys-
HomeLink button and the hand-held transmitter button
tem.
until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink 4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink button
and hand-held transmitter buttons. and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is

complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
when the HomeLink button is pressed.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds, and
then turns to a constant light, proceed to Step 5 Pro-
gramming A Rolling Code System.
5. Programming A Rolling Code System
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the Learn or Training button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is GARAGE DOOR OPENER TRAIN BUTTON
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
1 Door Opener 2 Training Button
door).
6. Firmly press and release the Learn or Training Using HomeLink

button. The name and color of the button may vary by To operate, simply press and release the programmed
manufacturer. HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
step after the Learn button has been pressed.
etc. The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be 3
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed used at any time.
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
Reprogramming a Single Homelink Button
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
activates, programming is complete.
follow these steps:
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
call toll-free 18003553515 or, on the Internet at
release the button.
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program-
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons,
ming Homelink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
GATE OPERATOR/CANADIAN PROGRAMMING has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans- fully trained.
mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
at this time.
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner. Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming
HomeLink, earlier in this section.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage SECURITY
door or gate motor. It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace Programming To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
HomeLink Step 3, with the following: seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button
erased.
while you press and release - every two seconds
(cycle) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here received including interference that may cause undesired
are some of the most common solutions: operation.
Replace the battery in the original transmitter. NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
Press the Learn button on the Garage Door Opener
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
3
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
ance could void the users authority to operate the
Did you unplug the device for training, and remember device.
to plug it back in?
The term IC before the certification/registration number
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica-
call toll-free 18003553515 or, on the Internet at tions were met.
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED
GENERAL INFORMATION The power sunroof control switch is located in the front
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry overhead console.
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: The sunroof panel tilts upward at the rear for ventilation
or slides rearward under the roof.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
Power Sunroof Operation Closing the Sunroof Manually

To close the sunroof from an open or vent position, press
Opening the Sunroof Manually
and hold the switch forward. The sunroof will close fully
Press the switch rearward and hold, and the sunroof will
and stop automatically. Release the switch to stop sun-
open automatically from any position. The sunroof will
roof travel at any point.
open fully, then stop automatically. During this opera-
tion, any release of the sunroof switch will stop the Sunroof Sunshade Operation
sunroof. The sunroof sunshade can be opened manually. How-
ever, the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof
WARNING! opens.
In an accident, there is greater risk of being thrown NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also open.
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
properly secured too.
Express-Vent
WARNING!
Press and release the V button, and the sunroof will
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in automatically open to the vent position. This is called
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat- Express-Vent.
tended children, can become entrapped by the power Express-Close
sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
3
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
death. will close fully, then stop automatically. This is called
Express-Close. During Express-Close operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Express-Open
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof WARNING!
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Express-Open. During Express-Open operation, any Never allow fingers or other body parts, or any object
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may
result.
Ignition OFF Operation Wind Buffeting

The power sunroof switch will remain active for 10 Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
either front door will cancel this feature. ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Auto-Express with AntiPinch Protection
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
During express closing, anytime an obstacle that restricts
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
glass movement is detected, the motor will stop and
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
reverse travel to avoid pinching the object.
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
Auto Express will stop and reverse travel up to three with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
times in succession. After the third time, Auto Express minimize the buffeting or open any window.
will enter a manual operation mode. This allows the
Sunroof Maintenance
operator to manually control the power switch in order to
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
close or open the sunroof in case of a malfunction.
the glass panel.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS IF EQUIPPED The outlets include tethered caps labeled with a key or
Two 12 volt power outlets are located in the center lower battery symbol indicating the power source. The lower
instrument panel next to the open storage bin. The upper instrument panel outlet is powered directly from the
outlet is controlled by the ignition switch and the lower battery, items plugged into this outlet may discharge the
outlet is connected directly to the battery. The upper battery and/or prevent engine starting.
outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit
The lower outlet is protected by an automatic reset circuit
3
(if equipped with an optional Smokers Package).
breaker. The automatic circuit breaker restores power
when the overload is removed. The circuit breaker also
supplies power to the outlet in the removable floor
console, when in the front position. Refer to section 3
Removable Floor Console in this manual.
A third outlet is located on the drivers side, just to the
rear of the sliding door and is also controlled by the
ignition switch. The lower and rear outlets will not
accommodate a conventional cigar lighter unit.
NOTE: If desired, all of the power outlets can be
converted by your authorized dealer to provide power
with the ignition switch in the OFF position.
POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED The Power Inverter switch is located near the center of
A 110 volt, 150 watt inverter outlet (if equipped) converts the instrument panel below the two 12 volt power
DC current to AC current and is located on the left rear outlets. Press the switch to turn the power on for the
trim panel immediately behind the second row left outlet, press the switch a second time to turn the power
passenger seat. This outlet can be used to power small off.
appliances and electronics.
Inverter Outlet Power Switch

110 Volt Power Inverter
NOTE:
WARNING!
When the Inverter Switch is pressed, there will be a
delay of approximately one second before the inverter To Avoid Serious Injury or Death:
status indicator turns ON. The status indicator of the
AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is Do not use a ThreeProng Adaptor.
producing AC power. Do not insert any objects into the receptacles. 3
Due to built-in overload protection the inverter will Do not touch with wet hands.
shut down if the power rating is exceeded. Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
ELECTRICAL OUTLET USE WITH ENGINE OFF SUN SCREENS IF EQUIPPED

Sun Screens are available for second and third row
CAUTION! seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels
and the tops of the windows are equipped with hooks
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the that the Sun Screen attaches to when pulled out.
vehicles battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicles
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum
cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery even more
quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater cau-
tion.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods
of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged
in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to
allow the alternator to recharge the vehicles battery.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage. Sun Screen Retracted
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.

Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is near the
top of the window.
Sun Screen Extended

To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upwards to
disengage the hooks and feed the screen back into the
Sun Screen Attaching To Retainer Clips base sill.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the window,
extend the top bar of the sun screen over the two hooks
attached to the top of the window.
CUP HOLDERS AND CONVENIENCE TRAY

DRAWER
There are nine cup holders in the interior. Two cup
holders in the center front instrument panel, four in the
floor consoles and three more are located in the third row
quarter trim panel.
All liners are removable for cleaning. Pull the flexible
liner from the cup holder drawer or tray; starting at one
edge to ease removal. Refer to Cleaning The Instrument
Panel Cup Holders in Section 7.
Instrument Panel Cup Holders
The instrument panel cup holders are located in a pull Front Cup Holders
out drawer just above the lower storage bin. Pull the drawer out firmly until it stops, and place the
container to be held in either one of the cup holder wells.
The cup holders are designed to accommodate a wide
variety of container types and sizes. Press down on the
container to engage the cup holder retention fingers.
Interior Bottle Holders Smokers Package Kit If Equipped

There are four bottle holders located in the interior. One With the optional authorized dealer-installed Smokers
bottle holder is molded into each front interior door trim Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is inserted into one
panels, and one bottle holder is molded into each side of the two cup holders in the center front instrument
sliding interior door trim panel. Each holder accommo- panel. To install the ash receiver, align the receiver so the
dates up to 20 oz. (.6 L) size plastic bottles. thumb grip on the lid is facing rearward. Press the ash 3
receiver into either of the cup wells to secure. Pull
Two outboard mesh pockets on intermediate seating. The
upward on the ash receiver to remove for cleaning
mesh pockets are flexible enough to hold juice boxes,
and/or storage.
toys, games or MP3 players, etc.
The left rear trim panel cup holder is designed to
accommodate a second ash receiver if desired.
CONSOLE FEATURES The Basic Console is removable from the vehicle for
There are two consoles available: Basic and Premium. additional floor space by removing the cap at the
console base.
Basic Console
Basic Console features consist of the following:
The basic console profile allows vehicle occupants to
easily pass through the first row to the second.
Four cup holders can accept extra large size beverage
cups or 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottles. The cup holders are
dishwasher safe for cleaning. To remove, pull the
flexible liner from the cup holder drawer or tray;
starting at one edge. Refer to Cleaning The Instru-
ment Panel Cup Holders in Section 7 for more
detailed information.
A Top Storage Tray. Basic Console Features
The cup holder/tray top is removable to access a large 1 - Console Anchor 3 - Front Cup holders
2 - Top Tray 4 - Rear Cup holders
storage bin.
To Remove The Basic Floor Console

WARNING!
Remove the front anchor cup plug and clip.
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
Slide the console base forward while lifting slightly to removable floor console is not properly installed.
clear the rear load floor hook. Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
Remove the console. latched. 3
To Reinstall The Basic Floor Console
Position the console at a slight angle (front slightly Premium Console If Equipped
higher than the rear. The three-compartment console with sliding storage bin,
sliding upper tray with storage and large console storage
Slide the console rearward into the floor bracket/hook. bin offers multiple configurations.
Align the console until the front anchor cup plug hole Four cup holders can accept large cups or mugs with
is centered on the winch hole. handles or 20 oz (.6 L) plastic bottles. The cup holders
Reinstall the clip first and then while pushing down- are dishwasher safe for cleaning. To remove, pull the
ward on the console with slight pressure, reinstall the flexible liner from the cup holder drawer or tray;
cover plug. starting at one edge. Refer to Cleaning The Instru-
ment Panel Cup Holders in Section 7 for more
Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched. detailed information.
Top Tray Storage

Upper Storage Bin can hold nine regular or 18 thin
CDs or other items
Large Console Center Storage will store headphones
for the available rear DVD entertainment system or
other items
12Volt DC Power Outlet provides continuous power
inside the console for cell phones or other electronics.
Rear Occupant Accessible
Multiple Adjustments Premium Console Features
Removable from vehicle for additional floor space. 1 - Top Release 3 - Console Release
2 - Center Release
The top and center console sections slide forward and

rearward to provide added user comfort. Four cup hold-
ers, each of which can accommodate large sized beverage
containers. A one-piece cup holder insert for both cavities
can easily be removed for cleaning. The cup holders will Position 2 shows the raised storage tray revealing a large
also accommodate large size cups and 20 oz (.6 L) bottles. storage area below.
Position 1 shows the console closed with four cup
holders and a convenient storage tray.
3
Console Position 2
Console Position 1
Dual Storage Bins Position 4 shows the complete console in its rearmost
Position 3 shows the top portion of the console in a position. Again, lifting second latch handle at the front of
rearward position. This is accomplished by lifting the the console, allows complete access to a lower storage bin
upper most latch at the front of the console. This provides and provides additional cup holders for rear passengers.
easy access to the storage area below and provides two of
the four cup holders for the second row passengers.
Console Position 4
Console Position 3
To Remove The Premium Floor Console Rotate the rear of the console down until it is resting
on the floor bracket
Pull up on the bottom release handle in the front of the
console Push down on the rear of the console until it is seated
in the rear floor bracket
Lift the rear of the console up several inches
Pull rearward to disengage from floor and remove
Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly latched 3
console
WARNING!
To reinstall the console:
Position the console at a slight angle (rear slightly removable floor console is not properly installed.
higher than the front Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
Slide the console forward into the floor bracket latched.
STORAGE
Glove Compartments
There are both upper and lower glove compartments.
Upper Glove Compartment
To open the upper compartment (1), press inward on the
release button (2). The door will spring open about one in
(2.54 cm). Manually lift the front edge of the door
upward, until fully opened, and the detent is engaged.
Glove Compartment Features

1 - Upper Compartment 3 - Lower Latch/Lock
2 - Upper Latch 4 - Lower Compartment
To close the compartment door, push firmly downward

on the doors surface to release the detent and latch the
door closed.
Lower Glove Compartment

To open the lower compartment (4) pull out on the
release handle (3). The lower compartment handle is also
equipped with a lock.
Door Trim Panel Storage
3
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple pockets for
storage.
Front Door Storage

1 - Storage Pocket 3 - Bottle Holder
2 - Rear Map Pocket 4 - Front Map Pocket
Sliding Side Door Bottle Holder Driver Seatback Storage If Equipped

Both sliding doors have a bottle holder molded right into The Drivers Seat Back has a Primary Storage Pocket on
the trim. all models and an optional Secondary Mesh Pocket.
Sliding Door Bottle Holder Drivers Seatback Storage

1 - Standard Pocket 4 - Bottle Holder
2 - Mesh Pocket 5 - Side Mesh Pocket
3 - Bag Holder
Second Row Floor Storage Bins If Equipped Pull up on the storage bin latch to open the cover. Slide
The Second Row Seat Storage Bins are located on the the storage bin locking mechanism to the unlocked
floor in front of the second row seats. The area below the position to allow greater access to the storage bin.
floor covers can be used for storage when the second row
seat is in the upright position. CAUTION!
3
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be locked to
avoid damage from contact with the front seat tracks,
which have minimal clearance to the cover.
Storage Bin Cover Lock Release

To remove the console use the following procedure:

WARNING!
1. Open the console lid and remove the storage tray.
In an accident, serious injury could result if the seat
storage bin covers are not properly latched. 2. Pull up on the release handle located inside the floor
console, and slide the console rearward to disengage
DO NOT drive the vehicle with the storage bin from the floor.
covers open.
3. Remove the floor console.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion. To reinstall the console use the following procedure:
DO NOT use a storage bin latch as a tie down. 1. Open the console lid and remove the storage tray.
2. Pull up on the release handle and slide the console
Removing The Floor Console With Stow n Go forward to engage the front of the console into the floor
Seating If Equipped tray.
The removable floor console has two power outlets, 3. Pivot the floor console down until it is seated on the
storage tray, light, removable cell phone holder, tissue floor tray and release the handle.
holder, pen holder and a map holder. It can be removed
from the vehicle by pulling the release handle inside the
floor console.
4. Pull up on the console to be sure it is firmly attached.

WARNING!

removable floor console is not properly installed.
Always be sure the removable floor console is fully
latched. 3
Removable Floor Console Features

1 - Removal Latch 4 - Front Cupholders
2 - Lower Latch 5 - Top Tray
3 - Upper Latch 6 - Rear Cupholders
Rear Compartment Storage Coat Hooks

Your vehicle is equipped with open storage areas located Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the second
in each rear trim panel. and third row seating positions. The coat hook load limit
is 10 lbs (4.5 kg). Exceeding the recommended load limit
can cause the coat hooks to break or disengage from the
vehicle.
Cargo Area Storage
The seats in your vehicle are in-line which enables you to
stow long objects, such as lumber or skis, on the floor
without moving the seats.
NOTE: With all rear seat backs folded, a 4 ft x 8 ft (1.2 m
x 2.4 m) sheet of building material may be stored on top
of the folded seats with the liftgate closed. The front seats
must be moved slightly forward of the rearmost position.
Third Row Rear Seat and Rear Compartment Features If the rear seats are removed no front seat adjustment is
1 Tie Down 5 Liftgate Close needed and more than one 4 ft x 8 ft (1.2 m x 2.4 m) sheet
2 Rear Switches 6 Bag Holders of building material may be stored.
3 Tire Jack/Handle 7 LATCH Anchor
4 Cubby/Speaker 8 Flash Light
The liftgate sill plate has a raised line with the statement ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED
Load To This Line. This line indicates how far rearward The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
cargo can be placed without interfering with liftgate weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
closing. load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
3
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
To move the crossbars, loosen the thumb screws located
at the upper edge of each crossbar approximately six
turns, then move the crossbar to the desired position,
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. Once the
crossbar is in place, retighten the thumb screws to lock
Rear Cargo Area Loading Limit the crossbar into position.
Attempt to move the crossbar again to ensure that it has

CAUTION!
properly locked into position.
NOTE: To help control wind noise when installing the Crossbars should remain equally spaced or paral-
crossbars make sure the arrows marked on the underside lel at any luggage rack position for proper func-
of the crossbars are facing the front of the vehicle. When tion. Noncompliance could result in damage to the
the crossbars are not in use, the front crossbar should be luggage rack, cargo and/or vehicle.
fastened just forward of the middle support and the rear To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
crossbar should be fastened at the rearmost position of exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150
the side rails. This will help reduce the amount of wind lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly
noise when the crossbars are not in use. as possible and secure the load appropriately.
The tie down holes on the crossbar ends should always
be used to tie down the load. Check the straps frequently
to be sure that the load remains securely attached.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Long loads which extend over the windshield, Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
large frontal area should be secured to both the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
front and rear of the vehicle. sonal injury or property damage. Follow the Roof 3
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care- Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the rack.
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to
a load. This is especially true on large flat loads
and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
UMBRELLA HOLDER LOAD-LEVELING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED

An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded into The automatic load-leveling system will provide a level
the left front door entry scuff molding. riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
Umbrella Holder
WARNING!
Do not install the load-leveling system on vehicles

that are not equipped with Anti-Lock Brakes. Ve-
hicles without Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS) have a height-
sensing proportioning valve. Installing a leveling 3
system will render this system ineffective, inappro-
priately reducing rear brake pressure, resulting in
increased stopping distances. You could have a seri-
ous accident.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
Instrument Panels And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Compass/Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . . . 241
4
Base Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Premium Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
EVIC Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC)
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Odometer Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Reset Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sales Code REQ AM/FM Stereo Radio And Operation Instructions - CD Mode For CD
6Disc CD/DVD Changer And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 254
List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . . 280
Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . . 280
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . . 262
Sales Code REN Multimedia System
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . . 264
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
List Button
Operating Instructions Satellite Radio
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . 267
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Info Button
Operating Instructions Voice Recognition
(Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . 267
System (VR) (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Sales Code RES AM/FM Stereo Radio
Operating Instructions Hands-Free
With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Communication (UConnect) (If Equipped) . . . 283
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 270
Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
Sales Code RER Multimedia System Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode . . . . . . 290
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
Operating Instructions Satellite Radio . . . . . 286 (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Operating Instructions Hands-Free Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
Communication (UConnect) (If Equipped) . . . 286 System (VES) (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) 4
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Satellite Radio If Equipped
(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU Radios Only) . . . . . 288 Connecting The iPod Device . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons . . . 294
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Selecting Satellite Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Sirius Backseat TV&Trade; If Equipped . . . . . 298
Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Video Entertainment System (VES)
Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 300 Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped . . 300 Winter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Vacation/Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
CD/DVD Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Manual Heating, Ventilation And Air A/C Air Filter If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Conditioning (HVAC) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Electric Rear Window Defroster
Rear Manual Climate Control Zone If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
INSTRUMENT PANELS AND CONTROLS
1 - Air Vents 6 - Upper Glove Compartment 11 - Storage Bin 16 - Head Light Switch
2 - Instrument Cluster 7 - Lower Glove Compartment 12 - Power Supply 12V 17 - Power Inverter Switch
3 - Gear Selector Lever 8 - Climate Controls 13 - Hazard Switch
4 - Radio 9 - Storage or DVD If Equipped 14 - Ignition Switch
5 - Analog Clock 10 - Cup Holders 15 - Dimmer Switch
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate
service is required and you may experience reduced
1. Fuel Gauge
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
your vehicle may require towing. The light will come ON
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly
2. Low Fuel Light as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gals starting, have the system checked by an authorized
(7.8 L) this light will turn on and remain on until dealer.
fuel is added.
4. Voltage Light
3. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC.) Light This light monitors the electrical system voltage.
This light informs you of a problem with the The light should turn on momentarily as the
Electronic Throttle Control system. If a prob- engine is started. If the light stays on or turns on while
lem is detected, the light will come on while the driving, it indicates a problem with the charging system.
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when Immediate service should be obtained.
the vehicle has completely stopped and the gear selector
is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running your
vehicle will usually be drivable, however, see your
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the
5. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp If overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
Equipped reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), the vehicles handling and stopping ability.
should be checked monthly when cold and
NOTE: Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsi-
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underin-
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
flation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of 4
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
tires.) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety

CAUTION!
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the The TPMS has been optimized for the original
TPMS from functioning properly. equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
NOTE: Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale warning have been established for the tire size
after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function placement equipment that is not of the same size,
properly. type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
For additional information on TPMS, refer to Section 5

Starting and Operating, Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem of this manual.
For additional information on Tire Pressures, refer to chime will sound for four minutes. After the chime turns
Section 5 Starting and Operating, Tire Inflation off, the engine will still be critically hot until the light
Pressures of this manual. turns off.
6. Oil Pressure Warning Light 8. Speedometer
This light shows low engine oil pressure. The light Indicates vehicle speed.
should turn on momentarily when the engine is
9. Turn Signal Indicators
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the 4
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
when the turn signal lever is operated.
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on. If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled about one mile with the turn signals on, a
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
for a defective outside light bulb.
7. Engine Temperature Warning Light
10. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
The malfunction lamp for the ESP is combined
tion. If the engine is critically hot, a continuous
with BAS. The yellow ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp comes on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position. They should go out with the indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
engine running. If the ESP/BAS Warning Lamp comes when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction dropped below a specified level.
has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system. If
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
soon as possible. tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
11. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
including brake fluid level and parking brake sary.
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that WARNING!
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system (if equipped). Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System 12. Vehicle Security Light If Equipped
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the mately 16 seconds when the vehicle security
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. the system is disarmed.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked 13. Anti-Lock Brake System Light
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Sys- 4
the ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi- tem. The light will turn on when the ignition
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless switch is turned to the ON position and may
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
by an authorized dealer.
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is is not functioning and that service is required. However,
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position. the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the 16. High Beam Light
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the This light shows that the headlights are on high
light inspected by an authorized dealer. beam. Pull the turn signal lever towards the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or low
14. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
beam.
Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during accelera- 17. Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped
tion, apply as little throttle as possible. While This light shows when the front fog lights are ON.
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road con-
18. Seat Belt Reminder Light
ditions, and do not switch off the ESP, or TCS.
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
15. Tachometer light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible check. During the bulb check, if the drivers seat
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the check or when driving, if the drivers seat belt remains
accelerator. unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate
and the chime will sound. Refer to the Occupant Re-
straints section for more information.
19. Malfunction Indicator Light 20. Airbag Light

This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system This light turns on and remains on for seven
called OBD that monitors engine and automatic seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
transmission control systems. The light will illu- switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on
minate when the key is in the ON position before engine during starting, stays on, or turns on while
start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key driving, have the system inspected by an authorized
from OFF to ON, have the condition checked promptly. dealer as soon as possible.
4
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap, 21. Temperature Gauge
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light perature. Any reading within the normal range
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In indicates that the engine cooling system is operat-
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will ing satisfactorily.
not require towing.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
If the Malfunction Indicator Light flashes when the ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
engine is running, serious conditions may exist that or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
H, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer decide to look under the hood yourself, see Section 7
remains on the H, and you hear continuous chimes, of this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cool-
turn the engine off immediately, and call your autho- ing System Pressure Cap paragraph.
rized dealership for service.
22. Trip/Odometer Display Reset Button Base

Cluster
To reset a trip odometer, display the trip odometer to be
reset then push and hold the button until the display
resets (approximately two seconds). The odometer must
be in TRIP mode to reset it.
To reset a message display (gATE, gASCAP, noFUSE, 24. Odometer Display Area
CHAngE OIL, LoCOOL, LoWASH), push and hold the When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
button until the display resets (approximately two sec- odometer messages will display:
onds).
Trip/Odometer Display Reset Button Premium CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
Cluster CRUISE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise Control On
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar
Press this button to change the display from odometer to ESPOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESP Off 4
either of two trip odometer settings. The letter A or B gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lift Gate Ajar
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer hood* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood Ajar
to 0 mi (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
reset it. LoCOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Coolant
LoWASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Washer Fluid
23. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transaxle gear NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a hood switch,
selection. in the case of hood ajar, a warning message will be
displayed in either the PRNDL/Odometer display as
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
hood or Hood Ajar in the EVIC display.
PARK.
NOTE: Some of the above warnings will be displayed in release the Trip / Odometer Display reset button on the
the Compass Mini-Trip Computer / Electronic Vehicle instrument cluster. To reset the oil change indicator
Information Center Display Area under the Speedometer. system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
refer to the following procedure.
Refer to Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) If
Equipped, later in this section for more information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
CHAngE OIL
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
within 10 seconds.
indicator system. The CHAngE OIL message will flash in
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
indicator system is duty cycle-based, which means the
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style. 25. Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
been driven.
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of 26. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Display /
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There- If Equipped
fore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Display If
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
Equipped
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
On vehicles equipped with CMTC, the display provides
be determined.
the outside temperature, one of eight compass headings 4
The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage. To to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing and the
switch from odometer to trip odometer, press the Trip current radio station. Refer to Compass Mini-Trip Com-
Odometer button. puter later in this section.
To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odom- Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
eter to be reset then push and hold the button until the If Equipped
display resets (approximately two seconds).
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
lower half of the speedometer.
Oil Change Required 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
will flash in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
(EVIC) display for approximately 10 seconds after a
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil 27. Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Display
change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your Button
personal driving style. Press the left reset button to scroll through sub menus
(i.e., Trip Functions: AVG Fuel Economy, DTE, Elapsed
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
Time, and Units.
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and NOTE: For more detailed operation, refer to Compass
release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator Mini-Trip Computer later in this section.
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
start the engine).
28. Fuel Door Reminder Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Odometer

The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the Displays
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
vehicle. odometer messages will display:
COMPASS MINI-TRIP COMPUTER (CMTC) IF CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required

EQUIPPED CRUISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise Activated
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar 4
NOTE: The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating,
ESPOFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ESP Deactivated
eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass. gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lift Gate Ajar
The Compass Mini-Trip Computer features a driver- gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
interactive display (displays information on outside tem- hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood Ajar
perature, compass direction, and trip information) and is noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
located in the instrument cluster. LoCOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Coolant
LoWASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Washer Fluid
These messages can be manually turned off by pressing
the right reset button (on the instrument cluster).
Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Reset When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
Buttons odometer messages will display:
CMTC Reset Button
Press the left reset button located on the instrument NE. Eight-point compass headings are displayed (N, S, E,
cluster to scroll through the sub menus (i.e., Trip Func- W, NE, NW, SE, SW)
tions: AVG Fuel Economy, DTE, Elapsed Time, and 14F. . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature (Fahrenheit or Celsius)
Units). AVG . . . . . . . . . Average Fuel Economy (U.S. or Metric)
DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance to Empty
To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the ET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elapsed Time
ON position, then press and hold the reset button for P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Park Assist On/Off
approximately two seconds.
Should this wrench symbol display with the
letter P next to it, your Park Assist System
needs servicing. Contact your authorized
dealer.
NOTE: Temperature and Average Fuel Economy can be
changed from U.S. or Metric by pressing and holding the
left CMTC Reset Button located on the instrument cluster.
Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) Trip Compass/Temperature Display

Odometer (ODO)
Compass Variance
This display shows the distance traveled since the last
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
reset. Press and release the right button located on the
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
instrument cluster to switch from odometer, to trip A or
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
trip B. Press and hold the right button while the
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
odometer/trip odometer is displayed to reset.
readings. In order to ensure compass accuracy, the com- 4
Trip A pass variance should be properly set according to the
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last compass variance map zone that the vehicle is in.
reset.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
Trip B the top of the instrument panel. This is where the
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last compass sensor is located.
reset.
To Set the Variance Manual Compass Calibration

If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate or abnormal,
NOTE: Refer to the Compass Variance Map in the
you may wish to calibrate the compass. Prior to calibrat-
following Electronic Vehicle Information Center
ing the compass make sure the proper zone is selected.
(EVIC) section for your Zone Value.
1. Start the engine, and leave the transmission in the
Start the engine, and leave the transmission gear selector PARK position.
lever in the PARK position. Press and hold (approxi-
mately ten seconds) the CMTC reset button until the 2. Press and hold (approximately 10 seconds) the CMTC
current variance zone number is displayed. To change the reset button until the current variance zone number is
zone, press and release the CMTC reset button to incre- displayed.
ment the variance one step. Repeat as necessary, until the 3. Release the CMTC reset button, then press and hold
desired variance is achieved. again (approximately 10 seconds), until the direction is
NOTE: The factory default Zone is 8. During program- displayed with the CAL indicator on continuously in the
ming, the zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to display.
Zone 1. 4. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle
in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph
(8 km/h) in an area free from power lines, large metallic
objects, until the CAL indicator turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER Compass display

(EVIC) IF EQUIPPED
Outside temperature display
NOTE: The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating,
Trip computer functions
eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
Audio Modes display
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the EVIC Menu / Step Control Button as it
instrument cluster. appears on the left side of the steering 4
column.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
System Status display Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between
Vehicle information warning message displays
Compass/Temperature, Trip, System Status,
Tire Pressure Monitor System and Personal Settings.
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)
Press the STEP button to scroll through sub EVIC Displays

menus (i.e. Trip Functions, Avg. Fuel Economy, When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
DTE, Elapsed Time, and Units. the following messages:
Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
Steering Wheel EVIC Compass/Temp
motion)
Control Button as it appears on the
right side of the steering column Liftgate Ajar (chime will sound when vehicle starts
moving)
Hood Ajar (If equipped with hood switch)
Check TPM System. Refer to Tire Pressure Monitor-
Press and release the C/T button to for instant ing System in Section 5 of this manual.
access to the Compass/Temperature Screens.
Turn Signal On
RKE Battery Low
Press this button to RESET Trip Functions and
LOW WASHER FLUID
Change Personal Settings.
Oil Change Required
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
Park Assist Disabled
Service Park Assist System
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not 4
Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park start the engine).
Oil Change Required 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change within 10 seconds.
indicator system. The Oil Change Required message will
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
TRIP FUNCTIONS determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous

Press and release the MENU button until one of the and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC: tank level.
Press the STEP button to scroll through all the Trip NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
Computer functions. loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion: When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
Average Fuel Economy
to a text display of LOW FUEL. This display will
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
RESET or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display.
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the Elapsed Time
reset. Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
Distance To Empty (DTE)
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
or START position.
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
Display Units of Measure in: Automatic Compass Calibration

To make your selection, press and release the STEP This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
button until US or METRIC appears. need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
To Reset The Display
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
displayed. Press and release the RESET button once to
360 turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all 4
objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC
resettable functions, press and release the RESET button
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
a second time within three seconds of resetting the
currently displayed function (Reset ALL will display Manual Compass Calibration
during this three-second window). If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
COMPASS DISPLAY
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the 1. Turn on the ignition switch.
compass button to display one of eight com-
2. Press the MENU button until Personal Settings (Cus-
pass readings and the outside temperature.
tomer Programmable Features) menu is reached.
3. Press the STEP button until Calibrate Compass is Compass Variance

displayed in the EVIC. Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
4. Press and release the RESET button to start the cali-
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
bration. The CAL indicator will be displayed in the
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
EVIC.
readings. For the most accurate compass performance,
5. Complete one or more 360 turns (in an area free from the compass variance must be set using the following
large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator procedure:
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the top of the instrument panel. This is where the
compass sensor is located.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.

2. Press and hold the compass button for approximately
two seconds.
3. Press the STEP button until Compass Variance mes-
sage and the last variance zone number displays in the
EVIC.
4
4. Press and release STEP button until the proper vari-
ance zone is selected according to the map.
5. Press and release the compass button to exit.
PERSONAL SETTINGS (CUSTOMER
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK. If the trans-
mission is out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a
warning message PERSONAL SETTING NOT AVAIL-
ABLE followed in three seconds by VEHICLE NOT IN
PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set- Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit
tings displays in the EVIC. When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
Use the Step button to display one of the following
NEUTRAL position and the drivers door is opened. To
choices:
make your selection, press and release the RESET button
Language until ON or OFF appears.
When in this display you may select one of five lan-
Remote Key Unlock
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the drivers
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
door will unlock on the first press of the remote keyless
the reset button while in this display to select English,
entry unlock button. When Driver Door 1st Press is
Spanish (Espaol), French (Franais), Italian (Italiano),
selected, you must press of the remote keyless entry
German (Deutsch), and Dutch (Nederlands). Then, as
unlock button twice to unlock the passengers doors.
you continue, the information will display in the selected
When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will
language.
unlock on the first press of the remote keyless entry
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h) unlock button. To make your selection, press and release
When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically the RESET button until Driver Door 1st Press or All
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). Doors 1st Press appears.
To make your selection, press and release the RESET
button until ON or OFF appears.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock SELECT button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears. Refer to
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when Lights/SmartBeams If Equipped in Section 3 of this
the remote keyless entry LOCK button is pressed. This manual for more information.
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto
on lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press
Headlights Only)
and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears.
When YES (Y) is selected, and the headlight switch is in
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi- 4
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
selected. To make your selection, press and release the button until YES (Y) or NO (N) appears.
RESET button until ON or OFF appears.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
Automatic High Beams If Equipped causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights brightness, refer to Lights in Section 3 of this manual.
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
Delay Turning Headlights Off
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press Rear Park Assist System If Equipped
and release the RESET button until 0, 30, 60, or 90 When ENABLE is selected, the Rear Park Assist System is
appears. activated. When DISABLE is selected, the System is
deactivated and, the instrument cluster will display the
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
PARK ASSIST DISABLED message.
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are Display Units of Measure in
unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter. To The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
make your selection, press and release the RESET button equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
until OFF, 30 sec., 60 sec., or 90 sec. appears. units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the RESET button until US or METRIC appears.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
switches, radio, handsfree system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), RADIO BROADCAST SIGNALS
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes Your radio will provide excellent reception under most
after the ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
door will cancel this feature. To make your selection, radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-
press and release the RESET button until Off, 45 sec., 5 eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
min., or 10 min. appears. believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these ap- FM Reception
parent malfunctions, you must understand a point or Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia-
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig- tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations
nals. can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals: NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if
equipped), and six-disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped) 4
1. AM or Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmit-
will remain active for up to 90 seconds after the ignition
ted sound causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio
switch has been turned OFF, depending upon the EVIC,
waves to vary.
Accessory Delay setting. Opening a vehicle front door
2. FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the frequency will cancel this feature.
of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
Electrical Disturbances
AM Reception Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
and neon signs. interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
SALES CODE REQ AM/FM STEREO RADIO When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
AND 6DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX set at the same volume level as last played.
JACK)
SEEK Buttons
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
side of your radio faceplate. listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC another selection. Holding either button will bypass
position to operate the radio. stations without stopping until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) SCAN Button
Push the On/Volume control knob to turn on the radio. Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
Press the control knob a second time to turn off the radio. the next listenable station, in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
Electronic Volume Control
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
On/Volume control knob to the right increases the vol-
ume and to the left decreases it.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect Hands-Free TIME Button

Phone) If Equipped Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
(UConnect) feature (if equipped). Refer to Hands-Free between the time and frequency displays.
Communication (UConnect) in Section 3.
Clock Setting Procedure
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
available on your vehicle, a Not Equipped With 4
UConnect message will display on the radio screen. 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/Scroll
control knob.
Phone Button (UConnect Hands-Free Phone) If
Equipped 3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side Tune/
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone Scroll control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will
(UConnect) feature (if equipped). Refer to Hands-Free begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Scroll
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not control knob. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob to save
available on your vehicle, a Not Equipped With the time change.
UConnect message will display on the radio screen.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry. Once in Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob and BASS will
this display follow the above procedure, starting at Step display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to the right or
2. left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
INFO Button Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a second time
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call and MID will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). tones.
RW/FF Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a third time and
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons TREBLE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fourth time
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
and BALANCE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control
TUNE Control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to right or left side speakers.
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fifth time and 16-Digit Character
FADE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to Program Type
Display
the left or right to adjust the sound level between the No program type or un-
front and rear speakers. None
defined
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob again to exit Adult Hits Adlt Hit
setting tone, balance, and fade. Classical Classicl
MUSIC TYPE Button Classic Rock Cls Rock 4
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type College College
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button Country Country
or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five Foreign Language Language
seconds will allow the program format type to be se- Information Inform
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Jazz Jazz
Music Type information. News News
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following Nostalgia Nostalga
format types: Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
16-Digit Character station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Program Type Music Type function only operates when in the FM
Display
Rhythm and Blues R&B mode.
Religious Music Rel Musc If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Religious Talk Rel Talk (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
Rock Rock exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
Soft Soft SETUP Button
Soft Rock Soft Rck Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B the following items:
Sports Sports NOTE: Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to scroll
Talk Talk through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
Top 40 Top 40 select an entry and make changes.
Weather Weather
DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between NOTE: These selections can only be made while playing
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by a DVD.
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
VES Power - Allows you to turn VES on and off (if
equipped).
DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following: VES Lock - Locks out rear VES remote controls (if
equipped).
Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch 4
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are VES CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the mode
available on the disc (if equipped). of either the IR1 or IR2, wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
the disc) (if equipped). you to set the clock. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
Tune/Scroll control knob to adjust the minutes. Press
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
the Tune/Scroll control knob again to save changes.
equipped).
Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
NOTE: The available selections for each of the above
user to scroll through the following items, and set
entries varies depending upon the disc.
defaults according to customer preference.
Menu Language If Equipped Subtitle Language If Equipped

Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if language (effective only if the language is supported by
language supported by disc). If you want to select a the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
language not listed, then scroll down and select other. down and selecting other. Enter the country code using
Enter the four-digit country code using the Tune/Scroll the Tune/Scroll control knob to scroll up and down to
control knob to scroll up and down to select the number select the number and then push to select.
and then push to select.
Subtitles If Equipped
Audio Language If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio Off or On.
language (effective only if the language is supported by
Audio DRC If Equipped
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting other. Enter the country code using Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
the Tune/Scroll control knob to scroll up and down to dynamic range. The default is set to High, and under
select the number and then push to select. this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is Normal.
Aspect Ratio If Equipped SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
AutoPlay If Equipped Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the 4
ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
stored into pushbutton memory.
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play. You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
customer-preferred settings.
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
AM and FM Buttons memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes. twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding

CAUTION!
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6 The radio may shut down during extremely hot
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12 Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is
Satellite (if equipped) stations}. reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
DISC Button components.
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO) position to operate the radio.
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc(s)
geographic region. These region codes must match in Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code INSERT DISC, insert the CD into the player.
of the player a maximum of five times.
Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
is loading and READING DISC when the radio is CDs will be ejected from the radio.
reading the disc.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
CAUTION! SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
This CD player will accept 43/4 in (12 cm) discs only. CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the 4
player mechanism. previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc(s) CD, MP3/MWA modes.
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the SCAN Button (CD MODE)
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio CD currently playing.
display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is TIME Button (CD MODE)
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc. Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE) Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button When reading discs recorded using formats other than
works in a similar manner. ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Switches the radio to the Radio mode.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable Maximum number of directory levels: 8
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
Maximum number of files: 255
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions. Maximum number of folders: 100
Supported Media (Disc Types) Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
Level 1: 12 (including a separator . and a three-
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
character extension)
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/ frequencies in the following table are supported. In
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as keep addition, Variable Bit Rates (VBR) are also supported.
disc open after writing are most likely multisession The majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/ rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
MP3 File Format 4
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and MPEG Specifi- Sampling Fre-
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/ Bit Rate (kbps)
cation quency (kHz)
WMA tracks on that disc. 320, 256, 224,
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause play- 160, 128, 144,
MPEG-2 Audio
back problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file 24, 22.05, 16 112, 96, 80, 64,
Layer 3
56, 48
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
WMA File Format Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
WMA Specifica- Sampling Fre- affected by the following:
Bit Rate (kbps)
tion quency (kHz) Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
48, 64, 96, 128, CD-R media
WMA 44.1 and 48
160, 192 VBR
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title to load than non-multisession discs
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios. Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported. To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
Playback of MP3/WMA Files single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded, before writing to the disc.
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play) Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders to return to elapsed time display.
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
turning the Tune/Scroll control knob. Selecting a folder
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
by pressing the Tune/Scroll control knob will begin
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
playing the files contained in that folder (or the next
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
utilize the vehicles audio system to amplify the source 4
playable files).
and play through the vehicle speakers.
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play) iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
devices volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
is not loud enough, turn the devices volume up. If the
Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the devices volume
time priority mode. down.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
more and radio will display song titles for each file. No function.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode) Operating Instructions Voice Recognition

No function. System (VR) (If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to Voice Recognition System (VR) in
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Section 3.
No function.
For UConnect Voice Recognition System (VR) refer to
Hands-Free Communication (UConnect) in Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
(UConnect) If Equipped
Press the TIME button to change the display from
Refer to Hands-Free Communication (UConnect) in
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
Section 3.
display for five seconds.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
Equipped)
No function.
Refer to Satellite Radio in this section.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
No function.
System (VES) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES)
Guide.
Dolby SALES CODE RES AM/FM STEREO RADIO

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
Dolby Laboratories.
side of your radio faceplate.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec- 4
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited
DTS
DTS and DTS 2.0 are trademarks of Digital The-
ater Systems, Inc.
RES Radio (Non-Satellite Model Shown -
With Satellite Similar)
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
position to operate the radio.
stations without stopping until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
SCAN Button
Push the On/Volume control knob to turn on the radio.
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
Push the On/Volume control knob a second time to turn
the next listenable station in AM or FM frequencies,
off the radio.
pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before
Electronic Volume Control continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 SCAN button a second time.
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
Voice Recognition System (Radio) If Equipped
On/Volume control knob to the right increases the vol-
Refer to Voice Recognition System (VR) in Section 3.
ume and to the left decreases it.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect Hands-Free
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
Phone) If Equipped
set at the same volume level as last played.
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
SEEK Buttons (UConnect) feature (if equipped). Refer to Hands-Free
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next Communication (UConnect) in Section 3.
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/Scroll
available on your vehicle, a Not Equipped With control knob.
UConnect message will display on the radio screen.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side Tune/
Phone Button (UConnect Hands-Free Phone) If Scroll control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will
Equipped begin to blink.
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Scroll
(UConnect) feature (if equipped). Refer to Hands-Free 4
control knob. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob to save
time change.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
available on your vehicle, a Not Equipped With
UConnect message will display on the radio screen. The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
TIME Button
SETUP button, use the Tune/Scroll control to select SET
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio,
between the time and frequency displays.
press the SETUP button and then follow the above
Clock Setting Procedure procedure, starting at Step 2.
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
INFO Button Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a second time
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call and MID will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only). tones.
RW/FF Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a third time and
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons TREBLE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fourth time
AM or FM frequencies.
and BALANCE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control
TUNE Control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to right or left side speakers.
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob a fifth time and
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade FADE will display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob and BASS will the left or right to adjust the sound level between the
display. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob to the right or front and rear speakers.
left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob again to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button 16-Digit Character

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type Program Type
Display
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button Foreign Language Language
or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five
Information Inform
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
Jazz Jazz
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information. News News
Nostalgia Nostalga 4
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
Oldies Oldies
format types:
Personality Persnlty
16-Digit Character Public Public
Program Type
Display
Rhythm and Blues R&B
No program type or un-
None Religious Music Rel Musc
defined
Adult Hits Adlt Hit Religious Talk Rel Talk
Classical Classicl Rock Rock
Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Soft
College College Soft Rock Soft Rck
Country Country Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R & B
16-Digit Character Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow
Program Type you to set the clock. Turn the Tune/Scroll control knob
Display
Sports Sports to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
Tune/Scroll control knob to adjust the minutes. Press
Talk Talk
the Tune/Scroll control knob again to save changes.
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM modes.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory
station with the same selected Music Type name. The When you are receiving a station that you wish to
Music Type function only operates when in the FM commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
mode. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type and press and release that button. If a button is not
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station. ton, the station will continue to play but will not be
SETUP Button stored into pushbutton memory.
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by Operation Instructions - CD MODE for CD and
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press MP3 Audio Play
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
position to operate the radio.
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM
stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The sta- NOTE: This radio is capable of playing compact discs
tions stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable com-
the pushbutton twice. pact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and 4
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display. Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
Buttons 1 - 6
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
stations).
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
DISC Button ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
show the disc number, the track number, and index time Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
CAUTION! If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
This CD player will accept 43/4 in (12 cm) discs the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism. A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
away and jam the player mechanism. convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert SEEK Button
a second CD if one is already loaded. Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
can cause damage to the player.
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK AM or FM Button

button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Switches the AM or FM radio to the opposite radio mode.
CD, MP3 modes.
RND Button (Random Play Button)
SCAN Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
CD currently playing. compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. 4
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. domly selected track.
RW/FF Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of Play.
the current CD track/title.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or file recording media and formats are limited. When
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
works in a similar manner. tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types) a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3. 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- Level 2: 31 (including a separator . and a three-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. character extension)
The radio uses the following limits for file systems: Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Maximum number of files: 255 Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after
writing are most likely multisession discs. The use of
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
Supported MP3 File Formats MPEG Specifi- Sampling Fre-

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten- Bit Rate (kbps)
cation quency (kHz)
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 320, 256, 224,
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128,
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will 48, 44.1, 32
Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
not play the file. 56, 48, 40, 32
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to 160, 128, 144,
MPEG-2 Audio 112, 96, 80, 64, 4
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the 24, 22.05, 16
Layer 3 56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
16, 8
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
VBR bit rates. are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more turning the Tune/Scroll control knob. Selecting a folder
time to start playing the MP3 files. by pressing the Tune/Scroll control knob will begin
playing the files contained in that folder (or the next
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
by the following:
playable files).
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
to load than non-multisession discs
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Number of files and folders - Loading times will Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended time priority mode.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
before writing to the disc.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
to return to elapsed time display. Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
OFF).
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicles (UConnect) (If Equipped)
audio system to amplify the source and play through the Refer to Hands-Free Communication (UConnect) in 4
vehicle speakers. Section 3.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil- Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
iary device if the AUX jack is connected. Equipped)
Refer to Satellite Radio in this section.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
devices volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
not loud enough, turn the devices volume up. If the AUX System (VES) (If Equipped)
audio sounds distorted, turn the devices volume down. Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES)
Guide.
SALES CODE REN MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM IF through the systems wireless headphones. This means
EQUIPPED rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional
rear seat entertainment system, while the driver and
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
front-seat passenger listen to the radio.
of the units faceplate.
Other special features include direct tune, music type
The REN Multimedia system contains a radio, CD/DVD
selections, easy store presets, backup camera display for
player, USB port, a 20-gigabyte hard drive (HDD), and a
vehicles equipped with a backup camera, and on some
JukeBox (virtual CD changer). Sirius Satellite Radio is
models, a dual display screen operation. Refer to your
optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows for easy
radio-specific users manual for detailed operating in-
menu selection.
structions.
A 20-gigabyte HDD allows uploads of music and photos
Operating Instructions Satellite Radio (If
from CDs or through the USB port. The Gracenote
Equipped)
database finds the artist, track, and title for the music.
Refer to your Radio-specific users manual for detailed
An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a operating instructions.
portable MP3 player through the vehicles speakers. For
vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System
(VES), separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen
to the vehicle speakers while different audio tracks play
Operating Instructions Voice Recognition 3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
System (VR) (If Equipped) word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
For the radio, refer to Voice Recognition System (VR) in played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
Section 3. where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down-
ward is displayed.
For Hands Free Phone Communication (UConnect)
Voice Recognition System (VR), refer to Hands-Free 4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
Communication (UConnect) in Section 3. the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is 4
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing
Communication (UConnect) (If Equipped)
downward is displayed.
Refer to Hands-Free Communication (UConnect) in
Section 3. 5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word Save is displayed.
Clock Setting Procedure
Changing Daylight Savings Time
Setting the Clock
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
1. Turn on the multimedia system. daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen. 1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is
clock setting menu will appear on the screen. Off are displayed to change the current setting.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in Changing the Time Zone
the box next to the words Daylight Savings. Touch the
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis-
played to change the current setting. 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day 3. Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are
on the touch screen when the multimedia system is displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
turned off. Proceed as follows to change the current the screen.
setting:
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
1. Turn on the multimedia system. selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word Page is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
5. Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off.
SALES CODE RER MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM IF The satellite navigation capability combines a Global-
EQUIPPED Positioning System (GPS)-based navigation system with
an integrated color screen to provide maps, turn identi-
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
fication, selection menus, and instructions for selecting a
of the units faceplate.
variety of destinations and routes.
The RER Multimedia system contains a radio, Sirius
A shared HDD for the navigation system, the database,
Satellite Radio player, navigation system, CD/DVD
and other radio features allows uploads of music and 4
player, USB port, 20-gigabyte hard drive (HDD), and the
photos from CDs or through the USB port. The Gracenote
UConnect Hands-Free Bluetooth cellular system.
database finds the artist, track, and title for the music.
NOTE: If your vehicle is not equipped with UConnect,
An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a
the unit will respond with a Not Equipped With
portable MP3 player through the vehicles speakers. For
UConnect message when selecting controls related to
vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System
this feature.
(VES), separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen
A 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows easy menu selec- to the vehicle speakers while different audio tracks play
tion, while the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes through the systems wireless headphones. This means
more than 1,000 words for audio, navigation, entertain- rear-seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional
ment, and hands-free mobile phone use. rear-seat entertainment system while the driver and
front-seat passenger listen to the radio.
Other special features include direct tune, music type Clock Setting Procedure
selections, traffic messaging (optional), easy store presets, The GPS receiver in this system is synchronized to the
parental lockout for VES (if equipped), backup camera time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The
display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera, and satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
on some models, a dual display screen operation. Refer to the worldwide standard for time. This makes the sys-
your Navigation Users Manual for detailed operating tems clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone
instructions. and daylight savings information is set.
Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Changing the Time Zone
Refer to your Navigation Users Manual for detailed
operating instructions.
clock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words
Communication (UConnect) (If Equipped)
Time: GPS Time are displayed at the top of the screen,
Refer to your Navigation Users Manual for detailed
proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3.
operating instructions.
3. If the words Time: User Clock are displayed at the
top of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where
the words User Clock are displayed. The GPS time
setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are 3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on the box next to the words Daylight Savings. Touch the
the screen. screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis-
played to change the current setting.
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you Setting the User Clock
want to select, touch the screen where the word Page is If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu. system clock, you can manually adjust the time by 4
performing the following:
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in 1. Turn on the multimedia system.
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
clock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words
1. Turn on the multimedia system. Time: User Clock are displayed at the top of the screen,
proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3.
clock setting menu will appear on the screen. 3. If the words Time: GPS Time are displayed at the top
of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where the
words GPS Time are displayed. The user clock time
setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis- clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down-
the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off.
ward is displayed.
Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where Off are displayed to change the current setting.
the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED
screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU RADIOS ONLY)
downward is displayed. Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
the word Save is displayed. Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
Show Time if Radio is Off sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
When selected, this feature will display the time of day dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
on the touch screen when the system is turned off. NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
Proceed as follows to change the current setting: limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
using the Tune/Scroll control knob until Sirius ID is
come kit that contains general information, including
selected. Press the Tune/Scroll control knob and the
how to setup your on-line listening account at no addi-
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number 4
tional charge. For further information, call the toll-free
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at
the radio to exit this screen.
www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Cana-
dian residents. ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
faceplate.
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
calling: All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification ESN/SID Access With REU Radio
Number (ESN/SID). While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center Reception Quality
of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your following reasons:
vehicle will display.
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
Selecting Satellite Mode structure or under a physical obstacle.
Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display. A
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
form of short audio mutes.
mode.
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
Satellite Antenna
cause intermittent reception.
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped). cause signal blockage.
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger lug-
gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not position to operate the radio.
place items directly on or above the antenna.
SEEK Buttons additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek to normal display).
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
INFO Button REU Radio
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
Pressing the INFO button will display information about
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing
without stopping until you release it.
the INFO button again will close the INFO screen. 4
SCAN Button
RW/FF
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
direction of the arrows.
button a second time.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
INFO Button Except REU Radio
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise to
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an MUSIC TYPE Button Except REU Radio
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the Tune/Scroll control knob within five Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the
seconds will allow the program format type to be se- MUSIC TYPE screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down,
lected. and scan will no longer be based on your selection.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music SETUP Button
type. Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO/
channel with the same selected Music Type name. SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Sirius subscription.
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel. SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
MUSIC TYPE Button REU Radio
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
Pressing this button provides a MUSIC TYPES list from
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
which you can make a selection. Once a selection is
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
made, you can seek up, or down, or scan the channels
and press and release that button. If a button is not
and the radio will tune to the next station matching the
selected format. There is no time-out for this screen.
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but- Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone (If
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be Equipped)
stored into pushbutton memory. Refer to Hands-Free Communication (UConnect) in
Section 3.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display System (VES) (If Equipped)
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES) 4
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into Guide.
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) IF
twice. EQUIPPED
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding NOTE: This section is for sales code RES/REL and
button number will display. REQ/RET radios only with UConnect. For sales code
REN/REZ touch screen radio and REU/REX/RE1 radio,
Buttons 1 - 6 refer to the separate Users Manual.
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
This feature allows you to plug an iPod mobile digital Connecting The iPod Device
device into the vehicles sound system through a connec- Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to
tor (UCI connector) using an optional connection cable the vehicles UCI connector (which is located in the glove
(available through MOPAR). See your authorized dealer box or center console on some vehicles. This location may
for details. vary with vehicle). Once the iPod is connected and
synchronized to the vehicle system (this may take a few
Using this feature,
seconds to connect), the vehicle brand logo appears on
the iPod audio can be played on the vehicles sound the iPod display, and it starts charging and is ready for
system, providing metadata (Track Title, Artist, Al- use by pressing radio switches as described below.
bum, etc.) information display on radio.
Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons
the iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to To get into the UCI (iPod) mode and access a connected
Play, Browse and List the iPod contents. iPod, press the AUX button on the radio faceplate. Once
in the UCI (iPod) mode, the iPod audio track (if
the iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI
available from iPod) will start playing over the vehicle
connector.
audio system.
Play Mode RW (Rewind) Button

When switched to UCI mode the iPod will be in Play Press and hold the RW button to move backward in the
mode. In Play mode, you may use the following buttons current track. Holding the RW button long enough will
on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display take you back to the beginning of the current track.
data:
Pressing and releasing the RW button will go back five
Tune/Scroll Knob seconds of the current track.
Use the Tune/Scroll knob to go to the next or previous 4
FF (Fast Forward) Button
track.
Press and hold the FF button to move forward in the
The Tune/Scroll knob functions similar to the scroll current track.
wheel on the iPod mobile digital device.
Pressing and releasing the FF button will go forward five
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click while playing seconds of the current track.
a track skips to the next track.
SEEK Buttons
Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click Use the SEEK buttons to move to the previous or the next
during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the track.
previous track in the list and turning this button at any
If the left (down) button is pressed during the first two
other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the
seconds of the current track, it will go back to the
current track.
previous track in the list; if you press this button at any SCAN Button
other time in the current track it will go back to the Pressing the SCAN button will play the first five seconds
beginning of the track. of each track in the current list and then forward to the
next song. To stop the SCAN mode and start playing the
If the right (up) button is pressed during Play mode, it
desired track, press the SCAN button again.
will go to the next track in the list.
During the SCAN mode, you can also press the SEEK
INFO Button
button to the left or right to go to the previous or next
Press the INFO button while a track is playing to see the
tracks.
information (Track Title, Artist, Album, etc.) for that
track. Each press of the INFO button will take you to the RND (Random) Button (RES/REL Radios Only)
next screen of data for that track. Once you have seen all Pressing the RND button will switch between the shuffle
of the screens, the last press of the INFO button will take on and shuffle off modes of the iPod. If the RND icon is
you back to the Play mode screen on the radio. showing on the radio display then the Shuffle mode is on.
REPEAT Button List or Browse Mode
Press the REPEAT button to repeat the current playing During Play mode, pressing any of the following buttons
track. will take you to List mode. List mode enables you to
scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod
device.
Tune/Scroll Knob Radio Preset Buttons

In the List mode, the Tune/Scroll knob functions in a In the List mode, the radio preset buttons are used as
similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod. shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod device.
Turning the Tune/Scroll knob clockwise (forward) and 1 Playlists
counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through lists, dis-
2 Artists
playing the track detail on the radio display. Once you
have the track to be played highlighted on the radio 3 Albums 4
display, press the Tune/Scroll knob to select and start
4 Genres
playing the track. By turning the Tune/Scroll knob fast,
you can jump through the list faster. During fast scroll, 5 - Audiobooks
you may notice a slight delay in updating the informa-
6 Podcasts
tion on the radio display.
After pressing a preset button, you will see the list you
During all List modes, the iPod will display all lists in
are in on the top line and the first item in that list on the
wrap-around mode. So if the track you wish to select is
second line.
at the bottom of the list, you just turn the Tune/Scroll
knob backward (counterclockwise) to get to the track To exit the List mode without selecting a track, press the
faster. same preset button again to go back to Play mode.
LIST Button SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV IF EQUIPPED

Pressing the LIST button will take to the top level menu Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting
of the iPod. This takes you to the same top level menu technology to provide streaming video coast to coast. The
as on your iPod. Turn the Tune/Scroll knob to list the subscription service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
top menu item you wish to select and then press the SIRIUS Backseat TV offers three video channels for
Tune/Scroll knob. This will take you to the next sub family entertainment, directly from its satellites and
menu list item of the iPod and you can follow the same broadcasting studios.
steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod
NOTE: SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii and
sub menu levels are available on this system.
has limited coverage in Alaska.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Refer to your Video Entertainment System (VES), RER
The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to
Navigation or REN Multimedia User Manuals for de-
the genre listing on your iPod.
tailed operating instructions.
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES) IF Nine different medias to choose from in each screen
EQUIPPED (AM, FM, Sirius Radio, DVD1, DVD2, Hard Drive
The optional VES (Video Entertainment System) is Jukebox, AUX in radio, AUX1, AUX2).
available with:
The LCD screen(s) are located in the overhead compart-
One or two video screens ment console.
Additional single-disc DVD player with twoscreen
system 4
Battery-powered two channel remote control
Two remote headphones
Integrated remote storage in either screen location
Three different medias can be played simultaneously
(Cabin speakers and Headphone Channels 1 and 2)
Easy menu driven functions on touch screen radios
Video and audio input jacks available in rear seating
Overhead Video Screens
area
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES

Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF

EQUIPPED
VES Remote Control Location The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
NOTE: Refer to your VES Users Manual for detailed surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 Oclock
operating instructions. positions.
The right-hand rocker switch has a push button in the
center and controls the volume and mode of the sound
system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase
the volume. Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will
decrease the volume. Pressing the center button changes CD Player

the operation of the radio from AM to FM or Tape to CD Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
mode depending on which radio is in the vehicle. track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
The left-hand rocker switch has a push button in the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
center. The function of the left-hand switch is different
after the current track begins to play.
depending on which mode you are in.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the 4
The following describes the left hand rocker switch
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
operation in each mode:
The button in the center of the left-hand switch has no
Radio Operation
function in this mode.
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch CD/DVD MAINTENANCE
will SEEK down for the next listenable station. To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
The button located in the center of the left hand switch following precautions:
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
programmed in the radio pre-set push-button. surface.
2. If a disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, CLIMATE CONTROLS
wiping from center to edge. The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
disc; avoid scratching a disc.
instrument panel, below the radio.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
MANUAL HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR
or antistatic sprays.
CONDITIONING (HVAC) SYSTEM
5. Store a disc in its case after playing. The controls for the manual HVAC system in this vehicle
consist of a series of outer rotary dials inner push knobs.
6. Do not expose a disc to direct sunlight.
These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired
7. Do not store a disc where temperatures may become interior conditions.
too high.
8. Do not play discs that are small in size or have
irregular shapes.
Front Blower Control

There are four blower speeds. Use this
control to regulate the amount of air
forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the off position.
4
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotate the knob coun-
Manual HVAC Controls terclockwise from top center into the
blue area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures while rotating the knob
clockwise into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems PANEL Mode

lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con- Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumu- panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
BI-LEVEL Mode
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
Mode Control (Air Direction) conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
Mode control allows you to choose upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
from several patterns of air distribu- air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
tion. You can select either a primary comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
a blend of two of these modes. The FLOOR Mode
closer the control is to a particular Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
mode, the more air distribution you small amount through the defrost and side window
receive from that mode. demist outlets.
MIX Mode RECIRCULATION Control

Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side Press this button to choose
window demist outlets. This setting works best in between outside air intake or
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at recirculation of the air inside
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining the vehicle. A lamp will illu-
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. minate when you are in RE-
CIRCULATION mode. Only
DEFROST Mode 4
use the RECIRCULATION
Air is directed through the windshield and side
mode to temporarily block
window demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with
out any outside odors, smoke,
maximum blower and temperature settings for best
or dust and to cool the inte-
windshield and side window defrosting.
rior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in weather.
MIX and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the
NOTE:
A/C SNOWFLAKE button is not pressed. This dehu-
Continuous use of the RECIRCULATION mode may
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
In cold or damp weather, the use of the RECIRCULA- ECONOMY Mode

TION mode will cause windows to fog on the inside If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to
because of moisture build-up inside the vehicle. For turn off the indicator light and the A/C compressor.
maximum defogging, select the Outside Air position. Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem-
perature.
In order to prevent fogging, when the recirculation
button is pressed and the mode control is set to Air Conditioning Operation
PANEL the A/C will engage automatically. Push on this button to engage
the Air Conditioning. A light
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
will illuminate when the A/C
ing the mode control selection.
System is engaged
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control
airflow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
seat passengers.
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and RECIRCULA-
TION mode buttons at the same time.
Three Zone Basic Temperature Control If
Equipped
With the Three Zone Basic Temperature Control System,
each front seat occupant can independently control the 4
Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) op-
erations coming from the outlets on their side of the
vehicle.
Three Zone Temperature Control

1 Left Temp 7 Right Temp
2 PANEL 8 Rear DEFROST
3 BI-LEVEL 9 RECIRCULATE
4 BLOWER 10 Front DEFROST
5 FLOOR 11 A/C
6 MIX
The Three Zone Basic Temperature Control bottom panel The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
controls rear Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning climate control unit located on the instrument panel.
(HVAC) operations.
The front climate control unit has five positions, off, rear,
and a range of blower speeds. Only when the primary
control for the rear blower is in the REAR position do the
second seat occupants have control of the rear blower
speed.
REAR MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL ZONE IF
EQUIPPED
The Rear Manual Climate Control Zone system has floor
air outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door and
overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position.
The unit provides warm or cool air through the floor and
upper outlets.
Front Lower Three Zone Temperature Control Features
The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear
1 Left Heated Seat 3 Rear Temp
2 Rear Blower 4 Right Heated Seat
seat passengers are located in the headliner near the
center of the vehicle.
Only when the front control for the rear blower is in the
RR position do the second seat occupants have control of
the rear blower speed.
The rear blower control, located in the rear overhead
console has an off position and a range of blower speeds.
This allows the second seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. 4
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Manual Rear Zone Climate

Control system through an intake grille located in the
Rear HVAC Manual Controls
passenger side trim panel behind the third seat. The
1 Blower 3 Rear HVAC Lock heater outlets are located in the passenger side trim
2 Temperature 4 MODE Select
panel just behind the sliding door. Do not block or
Rear Blower Control place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
climate control unit located on the instrument panel. causing damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control control is in FLOOR, DEFROST, or MIX modes, airflow

When the blower knob on the front climate control unit is will be directed out of the rear floor outlets.
set to any position other than RR , the rear temperature
Rear Mode Control
selection follows the setting of the rear temperature
control knob on the front climate control unit. The rear FLOOR Mode
mode selection follows the setting of the rear mode Air comes from the floor outlets.
control knob.
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle, BI-LEVEL Mode
rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
cold and clockwise for heated air. floor outlets.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated and mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
the rear overhead adjustments are ignored. liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit opera- HEADLINER Mode
tion. Rear PANEL mode is automatically selected when Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
the front control is in the PANEL mode. When the front these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
unit is in BI-LEVEL mode, airflow will be emitted from the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
both the upper and lower rear outlets. When the front side will shut off the airflow.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (ATC) The Infrared Three-Zone ATC System automatically
IF EQUIPPED maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver
and all passengers. This is accomplished by an infrared
Front Three Zone ATC allows both the driver and front
sensor, located in the forward overhead console. Based
occupant and rear seat occupants to select individual
on the sensor input, the system automatically adjusts the
comfort settings
air temperature, the airflow volume, and amount of
Occupants in the vehicle select AUTO mode operation outside air recirculation. This maintains a comfortable
and a comfort temperature setting, using rotary knobs temperature even under changing conditions. 4
on the control unit.
The system provides set-and-forget operation for op-
timum comfort and convenience.
The system can be controlled manually if desired.
SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones,
allowing one comfort setting for the cabin, if desired.
Below the automatic control, the system selects the

appropriate mode (airflow outlets) and fan speed.
Front Upper ATC Panel

1 - Left On/Off 9 - Right On/Off
2 - Blower 10 - AUTO Temp Front Lower ATC Panel
3 - Left Front Temp 11 - MODE
4 - Rear Blower/Temp 12 - Front DEFROST 1 - Blower 4 - Rear HVAC Lock
5 - SYNC Indicator 13 - RECIRCULATE 2 - Rear On/Off 5 - Rear DEFROST
6 - A/C Indicator 14 - Blower 3 - Rear Mode
7 - Right Front Temp 15 - SYNC
8 - MODE
Operation of the system is quite simple. NOTE:

It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
1. Press the AUTO button and the word AUTO will
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
illuminate in the front ATC display, along with three
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
temperatures for Drivers, Passenger, and Rear seats. The
comfort as quickly as possible.
system will then automatically regulate the amount of
airflow. The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric by
selecting the US/M customer programmable feature. 4
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
Refer to the Customer Programmable Features in
system to maintain by adjusting the drivers, passenger,
Section 3 of this manual.
and rear seat rotary temperature knobs. Once the desired
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
automatically maintain that comfort level. mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
on low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the front
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
ATC display until the engine warms up. The fan will
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
engage immediately if the DEFROST mode is selected or
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
by rotating the blower control to any fixed blower speed.
function automatically.
Manual Operation PANEL Mode

This system offers a full complement of manual override Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel.
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
be turned off when the system is being used in the direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the center
manual mode. outlets down, will close off the airflow from the center
outlets. The thumbwheel next to the outboard outlets can
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
be rotated to regulate or shut off the airflow from these
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
outlets.
the remaining features will continue to operate automati-
cally. BI-LEVEL Mode
Air comes from both the instrument panel outlets,
The left blower control knob can be set to any fixed
floor outlets and defrost. A slight amount of air is
blower speed by pressing the upper front blower rocker
also directed through the side window demister outlets.
button. The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until
additional speeds are selected. This allows the front NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
vehicle and cancel the AUTO mode. outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
The operator can also select the direction of the selecting
one of the following positions.
FLOOR Mode The SNOWFLAKE mode or A/C button allows

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of the operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air is directed through the defrost and side window air conditioning system. When in SNOWFLAKE
demister outlets. mode the ATC display is on, cool, dehumidified air flows
through the air outlets. If ECONOMY mode is desired,
MIX Mode
press the SNOWFLAKE button to turn off the SNOW-
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
FLAKE mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A/C
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or 4
system. Note: If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable
side glass, select DEFROST mode and increase blower
while keeping the windshield clear.
speed.
DEFROST Mode
RECIRCULATION Control
Air comes from the windshield and side window
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
demist outlets. Use DEFROST mode with maxi-
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
shield and side window defrosting.
pressing the RECIRCULATION mode control
NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system button. RECIRCULATION mode should only be used
will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or temporarily. The recirculation symbol will illuminate in
ice on the windshield. DEFROST mode must be manually the display when this button is selected. Push the button
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
a second time to turn off the RECIRCULATION mode The REAR SYSTEM control for the Rear ATC System is
LED and allow outside air into the vehicle. on the front ATC control unit located on the instrument
panel.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of the RECIRCULATION
mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The RE- Pressing the REAR LOCK button for the Rear ATC
CIRCULATION mode is not allowed in the FLOOR, MIX System from the front ATC control unit, illuminates a
and DEFROST modes to improve window clearing op- LOCK symbol in the rear display. The rear temperature
eration. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if and air source are controlled from the front ATC control
these modes are selected. Recirculation will be disabled unit.
automatically if these modes are selected.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) If control when the REAR LOCK button is turned off.
Equipped
The Rear ATC System is located in the headliner near the
The Rear ATC System has floor air outlets at the rear of
center of the vehicle.
the right side sliding door and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating positions. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
Operation of the rear system is quite simple.

1. Press the REAR LOCK button on the front ATC control
unit. This turns off the REAR LOCK icon in the rear
temperature knob.
2. Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
4
3. ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
Rear ATC Control Features comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
1 - Blower 3 - Rear Lock level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
2 - Temperature 4 - MODE experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
CAUTION!
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide Control System through an intake grille located in
comfort as quickly as possible. the passenger side trim panel behind the third seat.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric by The heater outlets are located in the passenger side
selecting the US/M customer programmable feature. trim panel just behind the sliding door. Do not block
Refer to ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or
CENTER (EVIC) IF EQUIPPED, Personal Settings heater outlets. The electrical system could overload
(Customer Programmable Features) in Section 4 of this causing damage to the blower motor.
manual.
Rear Blower Control Rear Temperature Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
or any fixed blower speed by rotating the knob from low rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the the temperature and clockwise to increase the tempera-
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle. ture. The REAR temperature settings are displayed in the
front ATC control.
When rear controls are locked by the front system, the HEADLINER Mode
LOCK symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored. these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
Rear Mode Control
side will shut off the airflow.
AUTO Mode
SUMMER OPERATION
The rear system automatically maintains the correct
The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles 4
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occu-
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
pants.
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
FLOOR Mode against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene
Air comes from the floor outlets. glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer
to section 7, Maintenance Procedures, of this manual
for proper coolant selection.
BI-LEVEL Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the WINTER OPERATION
floor outlets. To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
tration of coolant is used. Refer to section 7,
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Maintenance Procedures, of this manual for proper WINDOW FOGGING

coolant selection. Use of the air RECIRCULATION mode Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy
during winter months is not recommended because it or humid weather. To clear the windows, select DE-
may cause window fogging. FROST or MIX mode and increase the front blower
speed. Do not use the RECIRCULATION mode without
VACATION/STORAGE
A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they
of compressor damage when the system is started again. enter the plenum they could plug the water drains. In
winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush and snow.
OPERATING TIPS A/C AIR FILTER IF EQUIPPED

On vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Con-
trol (ATC), the climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Refer to Section 7 Air Conditioning
for filter replacement instructions.
ELECTRIC REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER IF

EQUIPPED 4
Press this button (located on your front climate
control) to turn on the rear window defroster and
the optional heated mirrors. A light will show that the
defroster is on. The defroster automatically turns off after
about ten minutes of operation, as long as the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
After the initial time interval has expired, if the rear
window defogger switch is pressed to the on position
again (during the same ignition cycle), the system will
automatically turn off after about five minutes.
NOTE: You may turn off the heated mirror feature at

anytime by pressing the rear window defogger switch a
second time.
CAUTION!
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the

rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window.
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Engine Block Heater If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 329 Electronic Brake Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
5
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . . 330 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Four-Speed Or Six-Speed Automatic Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Reset Mode - Electronic Transmission . . . . . . . 337
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 3.3L & 3.8L Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 4.0L Gasoline Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Tires General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Flexible Fuel 3.3L Engines Only . . . . . . . . . . 386
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 370 Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (Ffv) E-85 And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . 388
Basic TPMS Without EVIC If Equipped . . . . 372
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Premium TPMS With EVIC If Equipped . . . 374
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 407
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
5
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if NEVER leave unattended children alone in a ve-
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat hicle. Leaving children in a vehicle is dangerous for
belts. a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Dont leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
DO NOT leave animals or children inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep
in your car. Accidents can be caused by inadvert-
ently moving the gear selection lever. Accidents can
also be caused by pressing the accelerator pedal.
This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system,
resulting in overheating and vehicle fire, which may
cause serious or fatal injuries.
Automatic Transmission NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission

The gear selector lever must be in the NEUTRAL or shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
PARK position before you can start the engine. Depress depressed to shift out of PARK.
the brake pedal before shifting into any driving gear.
Extremely Cold Weather Starting Below 20F
Normal Starting (Above 32F/0C) (29C)
Follow the same instructions in the Normal Starting
1. DO NOT depress the accelerator.
procedure.
2. Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
ignition switch to the START position and release it as 5
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
continue to run, and it will disengage automatically
when the engine is running. High Altitude Starting Above 4,000 ft (1 219 m)
Follow the same instructions in the Normal Starting
3. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage
procedure.
automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
then repeat the normal starting procedure (Steps 13 an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
above). able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If The Engine Fails To Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
Normal Starting procedure, it may be flooded. Push
WARNING! the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
NEVER pour fuel or other flammable liquids into there while cranking the engine. This should clear any
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury. CAUTION!
DO NOT attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
To prevent damage to the starter, DO NOT crank the
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned engine for more than 15second intervals at one time.
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster have enough power to continue running when the key is
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel-
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
to Section 6 of this manual for proper jump-starting accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
procedures and follow them carefully. smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
second intervals of cranking with the accelerator pedal the drivers side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap
held to the floor, the Normal Starting procedure should that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
be repeated. Module.
After Starting
WARNING!
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up. Remember to disconnect the electrical cord before
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED driving. Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and could cause electrocution. 5
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the
electrical cord to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
CAUTION! It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of
PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
ing precautions are not observed:
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
Shift the gear selector lever into PARK only after forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
the vehicle has come to a complete stop. vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
Do not shift the gear selector lever from RE- into gear when the engine is idling normally and
VERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into any forward when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
gear when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting the gear selector lever into any Brake/Transmission Interlock System
gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake This system holds the shift lever in the PARK position
pedal. when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. It also
prevents you, once the engine is started, from moving the
gear selector lever out of PARK and into any gear unless
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down the brake pedal is pressed. This system is active only
while shifting out of PARK.
while the ignition switch is in the ON position. Always NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
press the brake pedal first before moving the gear selec- key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
tor lever out of PARK. feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System
service.
For electrical system malfunctions, there is an override
for the interlock system. In order to override this system, Four-Speed or Six-Speed Automatic
remove the cover located to the top right of the gear Transmission
selector lever in the instrument panel. The override can The electronically controlled transmission provides a
be activated by pressing the white-colored tab, which can precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are 5
be accessed through the hole in the instrument panel. self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
While the override is pressed, the gear selector lever can vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
be moved out of the PARK position without pressing the condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
brake pedal. After operation, return the cover to its hundred miles (kilometers).
original position.
The transmission has only PRND shift positions. Down-
This system prevents the key from being removed unless shifts are carried out by an Electronic Range Select (ERS)
the gear selector lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting by moving the lever / + while in the DRIVE position,
the gear selector lever out of PARK unless the key is in
the LOCK/OFF or ON positions.
the instrument cluster will display transmission gear When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
selection as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 for six-speed and 4, 3, 2, 1 for brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
four-speed transmissions. the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As
Gear Ranges
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
DO NOT race the engine when shifting the gear selector
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another
uphill grade.
gear range.
PARK WARNING!
Shifting the gear selector lever in PARK supplements the
parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine Never use PARK position on an automatic transmis-
can be started in this gear. Never attempt to use PARK sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
while vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
leaving the vehicle in this gear. against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that

WARNING!
you have engaged the transmission gear selector lever
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure into the PARK position:
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, When shifting the gear selector lever into PARK,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is depress the button on the gear selector lever and
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always firmly move the lever all the way forward until it
shift the gear selector lever into PARK, remove the stops.
key from the ignition, and apply the parking brake.
Once the key is removed from the ignition, the Look at the shift indicator window on the console to
transmission gear selector lever is locked in the ensure gear selector lever is in the PARK position. 5
PARK position, securing the vehicle against un- When engaged in PARK, you will not be able to move
wanted movement. Furthermore, you should never the gear selector lever rearward without depressing
leave unattended children or pets inside a vehicle. the gear selector lever button.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Before moving the gear selector lever out of PARK, Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
you must turn the ignition from LOCK/OFF to ON so ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
the steering wheel and gear selector lever are re- practices that limit your response to changing traffic
leased. Otherwise, damage to the steering column or or road conditions. You might lose control of the
gear selector lever could result. vehicle and have an accident.
REVERSE DRIVE Six-Speed Transmission

Use REVERSE for moving the vehicle rearward. Shift into This range should be used for most city and highway
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts,
stop. and best fuel economy. However, use the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) mode by moving the lever / + and
NEUTRAL
select the 5 range when frequent transmission shifting
Shift the gear selector lever into this gear only after the
occurs while using the DRIVE range, such as when
vehicle has come to a complete stop. The engine may be
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions,
started in this range.
(i.e., in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds or
while towing heavy trailers). Under these conditions,
using the 5 range will improve performance and

CAUTION!
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat build-up. If the transmission operating temperature exceeds
DRIVE Four-Speed Transmission acceptable limits, the vehicle computer will override
This range should be used for most city and highway DRIVE and select 5 range (on six-speed transmis-
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts, downshifts, sions) or 3 range (on four-speed transmissions) by
and best fuel economy. However, select the 3 range changing shift points. This is done to prevent trans-
when frequent transmission shifting occurs while using mission damage due to overheating.
the DRIVE range, such as when operating the vehicle 5
under heavy loading conditions, (i.e., in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
trailers). Under these conditions, using the 3 range will The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows
improve performance and extend transmission life by you to move the gear selector lever to the left (-) or right
reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. (+) when the gear selector lever is in the D (Drive)
position, this allows the selection of the desired top gear.
For example, if the driver shifts the transmission into 3rd
gear, the transmission will never shift above 3rd gear, but
can shift down to 2nd or 1st gear automatically, when
needed.
Switching from ERS to D-Mode (Drive) can be done at Odometer 1 2 3 4 5 6 D

any vehicle speed. To shift from Drive mode to ERS Screen Display
mode, move gear selector lever to the left (-) once. The Actual Gear(s) 1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-6
current gear will be maintained as the top gear. To disable Allowed
ERS, simply press and hold the gear selector lever to the Six-Speed
right (+) until D is displayed in the instrument cluster Transmission
odometer. Actual Gear(s) 1 1-2 1-3 1-4 N/A N/A 14
Allowed
WARNING! Four-Speed
Transmission
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
grip and the vehicle could skid causing an accident or
gear selector lever to the left (-). The transmission will
personal injury.
shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be
slowed down.
Reset Mode - Electronic Transmission 5. Shift into the desired gear range and resume driving.
The transmission is monitored electronically for abnor-
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, it is
mal conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
recommended that you visit an authorized dealer at your
damage, the transmission automatically shifts into 2nd
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
gear (3rd gear for six-speed). The transmission remains in
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
2nd gear (3rd gear for six-speed) despite the forward gear
recur.
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
to operate. This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam- service is required.
aging the transmission. 5
PARKING BRAKE
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the switch ON, the brake light in the instrument cluster will
following steps: turn on.
1. Stop the vehicle. NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
2. Shift into PARK. applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied by depressing the pedal located at
4. Restart the engine. the bottom left of the instrument panel and place the gear
selector lever in the PARK position. To release the park- before placing the gear selector lever in PARK, otherwise
ing brake, depress the emergency break pedal a second the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage. make it difficult to move the gear selector lever out of
PARK.
WARNING!
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-

ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage
or injury. Also be certain to leave an automatic
transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in
REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may allow
the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake
Parking Brake problems due to excessive heating of the rear
Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and brakes.
the gear selector lever is in the PARK position. When
parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
NEVER leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a systems loses normal capability, the remaining
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri- system will still function. However, there will
ously or fatally injured. Dont leave the key in the be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
ignition. A child could operate power windows, evident by increased pedal travel during application and
other controls, or move the vehicle greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In
addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the
hydraulic system, the brake warning indicator will turn 5
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the on as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder.
curb on a downhill grade, and away from the curb on an In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
uphill grade. example, repeated brake applications with the engine
The parking brake should always be applied whenever off), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
the driver is not in the vehicle. brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING!
ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake per-
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and formance under most braking conditions. The system
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot rest- automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking
ing or riding on the brake pedal can result in conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
wouldnt have your full braking capacity in an clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
emergency. debris, or panic stops.
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dan- You may experience the following when the brake system
gerous. A significant decrease in braking perfor- goes into Anti-lock:
mance or vehicle stability during braking may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
will make your vehicle harder to control. You short time after the stop).
could have an accident. Have the vehicle checked A clicking sound of solenoid valves.
immediately.
Brake pedal pulsations.
A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end

WARNING!
of the stop.
The Anti-Lock Brake System cannot prevent acci-
WARNING! dents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisti-
closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive,
cated electronic equipment that may be suscep-
and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
tible to interference caused by improperly in-
stalled or high output radio transmitting The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
equipment. This interference can cause possible never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous 5
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of manner which could jeopardize the users safety
such equipment should be performed by qualified or the safety of others.
professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident. type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just accurate signals for the computer.
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
Anti-Lock Brake Light to the ABS system is required. Consult with your autho-
The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock System. rized dealer service center as soon as possible.
The light will come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEMS
stay on for as long as four seconds. Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes TCS (Traction Control
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it System), BAS (Brake Assist System) and ESP (Electronic
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system Stability Program). These systems complement the Anti-
is not functioning and that service is required. However, Lock Brake System (ABS) by optimizing the vehicle
the conventional brake system will continue to operate braking capability during emergency braking maneu-
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on. vers.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced Traction Control System (TCS)
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
bulb repaired as soon as possible. power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribu- a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
tion (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
WARNING!
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
This feature remains active even if the ESP is in the ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
Partial Off mode. the traction afforded.
The Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator The TCS cannot prevent accidents, including those
Light, located in the instrument cluster, starts resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydro-
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
wheels begin to spin. This indicates that the can prevent accidents. 5
TCS is active. If the indicator light flashes during accel-
The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle must
eration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
manner, which could jeopardize the users safety
driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not
or the safety of others.
switch off the ESP or TCS.
Brake Assist System (BAS)

WARNING!
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicles braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The BAS (Brake Assist System) cannot prevent the
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens- natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevail-
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help ing road conditions.
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak- very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a
ing pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer accidents.
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
deactivated. never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the users safety
or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ESP ON

This system enhances directional control and stability of This is the normal operating mode for ESP on 2WD
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP cor- vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESP system
rects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter- driving situations. ESP should only be turned off for
acting the over/under steer condition. Engine power specific reasons as noted below.
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
ESP Partial OFF
desired path.
This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP
ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle OFF switch (located in the center switch bank, next to the 5
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual hazard flasher switch).
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
When in Partial OFF mode, the TCS portion of
the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropri-
ESP, except for the limited slip feature de-
ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
scribed in the TCS section, has been disabled
understeer condition.
and the ESP/TCS Indicator Light will be illu-
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than minated. All other stability features of the ESP function
appropriate for the steering wheel position. normally. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle
is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
gain traction. To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress Light comes on continuously with the engine running, a
the ESP OFF switch. This will restore the normal ESP ON malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
mode of operation. BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles/
NOTE: To improve the vehicles traction when driving
kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the Partial OFF
problem diagnosed and corrected.
mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch. Once the situation
requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial OFF mode is NOTE:
overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing The ESP/TCS Indicator Light and the ESP/BAS Warn-
the ESP OFF switch. This may be done while the vehicle ing Light come on momentarily each time the ignition
is in motion. switch is turned ON.
ESP/BAS Warning Light Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
The malfunction indicator light for the ESP is will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
combined with BAS. The ESP/BAS Warning
The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
light and the ESP/TCS Indicator Light in the
sounds when it is active, this is normal. The sounds
instrument cluster both come on when the
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position. They should
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
go out with the engine running. If the ESP/BAS Warning
POWER STEERING
WARNING!
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability Continued operation with reduced power steering
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
steering capability if power assist is lost. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering CAUTION!
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during 5
parking maneuvers. Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
occur.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES TRACTION

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
ACCELERATION
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
tions should be observed:
(driving) wheels.
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
WARNING! slushy.
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. 2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the 3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle become visible.
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction 4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.). 5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water

Driving through water more than a few inches/ Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. and Warning before doing so.
Flowing/Rising Water
CAUTION!
WARNING! Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of 5
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
Flowing water can wear away the road or paths
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper Determine the condition of the road or the path
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can that is under water, and if there are any obstacles
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this in the way, before driving through the standing
warning may result in injuries that are serious or water.
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Driving through standing water may cause dam- Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
age to your vehicles drivetrain components. Al- cles traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8
ways inspect your vehicles fluids (i.e., engine oil, km/h) when driving through standing water.
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) cles braking capabilities, which increases stop-
after driving through standing water. Do not con- ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
contaminated, as this may result in further dam- the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
age. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Getting water inside your vehicles engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
Getting water inside your vehicles engine can stranded.
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not Failure to follow these warnings may result in
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION European-Metric tire sizing is based on European

design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
Tire Markings
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter P is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced- 5
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter T
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
NOTE:
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter P High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa- standards, and it begins with the tire diameter molded
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H. into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart

Tire Sizing Chart
P Passenger Car tire size based on U.S. design standards
....blank.... Passenger Car tire based on European design standards
LT Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T Temporary spare tire
31 Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 Aspect Ratio of section height to section width of tire, written in percent (%)
10.5 Section width in inches (in)
R R means radial construction
D means diagonal or bias construction
15 Rim diameter in inches (in)
95 Load Index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry)
Tire Sizing Chart

H A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load
index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified
operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
....blank....
Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
5
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Load
Maximum Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Pressure
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the side of the tire.
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation tire safety standards, and is approved for highway use
MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 Two digit number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (03 means the 3rd week)
01 Two digit number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (01 means the year 2001)1
1
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the drivers door or the drivers side
B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
Tire Placard Location 4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You the weight referenced here.
will not exceed the tires load carrying capacity if you
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading 1. Locate the statement, The combined weight of occu-
Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs
of this manual. on your vehicles placard.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
Vehicle Loading in this section.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if XXX
vehicle, locate the statement, The combined weight of
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
each 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
lbs. on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 750 = 650 calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capaci-
lbs [295 kg]). ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
the seating and load carrying capacity of your vehicle.
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4. NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
kg). 5
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
1. Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!

can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
cause accidents.
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them. Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result
in tire failure.
TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION

5
WARNING!
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Over-inflation reduces a tires ability to cushion
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: damage that result in tire failure.
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability

WARNING!
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
You could lose control of your vehicle. Tire Inflation Pressures
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on the
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right face of the drivers door or on the drivers side B pillar.
or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
2. Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump-
tion.
Tire Placard Location
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
check tire pressure. DO NOT make a visual judgement
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
temperature changes.
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
CAUTION! 12 F (7 C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al- the winter. 5
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the Example: If garage temperature = 68F (20C) and the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. outside temperature = 32F (0C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12 F (7 C) for this
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always outside temperature condition.
cold tire inflation pressure. Cold tire inflation pressure Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 buildup or your tire pressure will be too low.
mi (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
Tire Pressures for High-Speed Operation Radial-Ply Tires

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi- WARNING!
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
tion. Refer to original equipment information or an ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating of trucks with dual rear wheels). NEVER combine
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. them with other types of tires.
WARNING!
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
High-speed driving with your vehicle at or above the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a Compact Spare Tire If Equipped
serious accident. Dont drive a vehicle loaded to the The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
mph (120 km/h).
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the DO NOT install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein- conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
stalled at the first opportunity. wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
DO NOT install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
WARNING!
on the vehicle at any given time.
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, DO NOT drive more than 50 CAUTION!
mph (80 km/h).
Because of the reduced ground clearance, DO NOT
Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread life. take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
5
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indica- the compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle
tors, the temporary use spare tire needs to be may result.
replaced.
Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Limited-Use Spare Tire If Equipped

WARNING!
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited- The limited use spare tire is for emergency use
use spare tire warning label located on the limited use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the affects vehicle handling.
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare DO NOT drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) with
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire, a limited use spare tire.
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the Keep the limited use spare tire inflated to the cold
vehicle at the first opportunity. tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire
placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assem-
bly.
Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Fail-
ure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning Tread Wear Indicators

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, DO Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
NOT spin your vehicles wheels faster than 30 mph (48 help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
km/h) or continuously for longer than 30 seconds with-
out stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 of this
manual for additional information.
WARNING! 5
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gen-
erated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone.
DO NOT spin your vehicles wheels faster than 30
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds continu-
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
ously when you are stuck, and dont let anyone near
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
point. exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Tire Life
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying Replacement Tires
factors including but not limited to: The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
Driving style
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
Tire pressure facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
Distance driven
when replacement is needed. Please see Tread Wear
Indicators and Tire and Loading Information placard
WARNING!
for the size designation of your tire in this section. The
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years, service description and load identification will be found
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, han-
could lose control and have an accident resulting in dling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
serious injury or death. contact your original equipment manufacturer or an
authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have
on tire specifications or capability.
WARNING! CAUTION!
DO NOT use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of un- may result in false speedometer and odometer
approved tires and wheels may change suspension readings.
dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting
in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and
stress to steering and suspension components. You Alignment and Tire Balance
could lose control and have an accident resulting in Poor suspension alignment may result in:
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel 5
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. Fast tire wear.
NEVER use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
other than what was originally equipped on your wear.
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose Vehicle pull to right or left.
control and have an accident.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad- Alignment will not correct this condition. See your
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire fail-
ure and loss of vehicle control. authorized dealer for proper diagnosis.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.

CAUTION!
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear. precautions:
Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other
TIRE CHAINS suspension components, it is important that only chains in
good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious
Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that
SAE type Class S specifications. Chains must be the could indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain the chain before further use.
manufacturer. Do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps,
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire. especially with a loaded vehicle.
Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about onehalf mile (0.8 km).
Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
Observe the tire chain manufacturers instructions on the
method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for
use. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the
chain manufacturer if different from the speed recommended
by the manufacturer.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both TIRE ROTATION
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacture suggest Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain different loads and perform different steering, driving,
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains. and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
SNOW TIRES terns.
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during Winter. Standard tires are of the all-season type These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
designation on the tire sidewall. aggressive tread designs such as those on All-Season type 5
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only smooth, quiet ride.
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle. Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
km/h). formed.
The suggested rotation method is the forward-cross decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
shown in the following diagram. cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than
three hours - and in outside ambient temperature. Refer
to the Tires General Information in this section for
information on how to properly inflate the vehicles
tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment
for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) threshold for any reason, including low temperature
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure effects, or natural air pressure loss through the tire.
based on the cold inflation tire pressure requirements
found on the tire placard located on the drivers-side The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
B-pillar. pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12F (6.5C). This means that when warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
increased to the recommended cold tire placard pressure TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires
in order for the TPMS warning lamp to be turned off. The have been inflated to the vehicles recommended cold tire
system will automatically update and the TPMS warning pressure value.
lamp will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven CAUTION!
for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive
this information. The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended been established for the tire size equipped on your
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor 5
35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68F (20C) damage may result when using replacement equip-
and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
temperature drop to 20F (-7C) will decrease the tire Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not
pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire use aftermarket sealants or balance beads if your
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the
Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire sensors may result.
pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the
TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-

CAUTION!
nance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always correct tire pressure, using an accurate tire pressure
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois- gage, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Lamp.
could damage the TPMS SENSOR. NOTE: Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire
NOTE: pressure in the tire.
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care BASIC TPMS WITHOUT EVIC IF EQUIPPED
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
failure or condition. mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
while adjusting your tire pressure. stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to check the
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and the proper pressure.
stopping ability.
The Basic TPMS consists of the following components: NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this infor-
Receiver Module
mation.
Four Wheel Sensors
The TPMS Warning Lamp will flash on and off for 75
TPMS Telltale Warning Light seconds, and remain on sold when a system fault is
detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the
The TPMS Telltale Warning Light will illumi-
ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, provid-
nate in the instrument cluster, and an audible
ing the system fault still exists. The TPMS Warning Lamp
chime will be activated when one or more of
will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A 5
the four active road tire pressures are low.
system fault can occur with any of the following sce-
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
narios:
check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the vehicles recommended cold 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
tire pressure value (located on the placard on the facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
drivers-side B-Pillar). The system will automatically sensors.
update and the TPMS Warning Lamp will extinguish
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
once the updated tire pressures have been received.
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
the wheels or wheel housings. sound and the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will remain
on solid.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
NOTE: tire, the TPMS will automatically update, and the TPMS
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a Telltale Warning Light will turn off as long as no tire
TPMS sensor. Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any
pressure in the compact spare tire. of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) for
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
the TPMS to receive this information.
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will PREMIUM TPMS WITH EVIC IF EQUIPPED
sound and the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will turn on. The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim-
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
3. After driving for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25
els. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
km/h), the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will flash on
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important to regularly check pressures are low. In addition, the EVIC will display one
and maintain proper tire pressure in all the tires. or more Low Pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear,
Right Front, Right Rear) for three seconds, and a graphic
The Premium TPMS consists of the following compo-
display of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s)
nents:
flashing.
Receiver Module
Four TPMS Sensors
Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel wells) 5
Various TPMS Messages, which display in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and graph-
ics displaying tire pressures
Yellow TPMS Telltale Warning Light
TPMS Low Pressure Warnings
The TPMS Telltale Warning Light will illuminate in the
Low Tire Pressure Display
instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be acti-
vated when one or more of the four active road tire
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four

active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicles recommended cold tire pressure
value. The system will automatically update, the graphic
display of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and
the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPMS Message
The TPMS Telltale Warning Light will flash on and off for Check TPM System Display
75 seconds, and remain on solid when a system fault is
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. The
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for
no longer exists, the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will no
three seconds. This text message is then followed by a
longer flash, the CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message
graphic display, with - - in place of the pressure value(s)
indicating which TPMS Sensor(s) is not being received.
will not be present, and a pressure value will be dis- 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
played instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by any tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
of the following scenarios: limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the TPMS Telltale
Warning Light will remain on, a chime will sound, and
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value in the
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
graphic display.
sensors.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
mph (25 km/h), the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will
that affects radio wave signals.
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 5
3. Accumulation of excessive snow and/or ice around In addition, the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM
the wheels or wheel housings. SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
sound, the TPMS Telltale Warning Light will flash on and
NOTE: off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC
1. The compact spare tire (if equipped) does not have a will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three
TPMS. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
in the compact spare tire. pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and General Information
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
TPMS Telltale Warning Light will turn off and the following conditions:
graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value
instead of dashes (- -), as long no tire pressure is below
the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active This device must accept any interference received,
road tires. including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS The tire pressure sensors are regulated under one of the
to receive this information. following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123

Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
FUEL REQUIREMENTS using high-quality unleaded gasoline having an octane

range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use
3.3L & 3.8L Gasoline Engine
of 89 octane for optimum performance. The use of
All engines are designed to meet all emis-
premium gasoline is not recommended. Under normal
sions regulations and provide excellent
conditions, the use of premium gasoline will not provide
fuel economy and performance when us-
a benefit over high-quality regular and mid-grade gaso-
ing high-quality unleaded regular gaso-
lines, and in some circumstances may result in poorer
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
performance.
of premium gasoline is not recommended.
Under normal conditions, the use of premium gasoline Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to 5
will not provide a benefit over high-quality regular your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
gasolines, and in some circumstances may result in high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
poorer performance. required.
4.0L Gasoline Engine Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
The 4.0L engine is designed to meet all starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
emissions regulations and provide satisfac- symptoms, try another brand of regular gasoline be-
tory fuel economy and performance when fore considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica- Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, ates are required in some areas of the country during the
engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
the WWFC specifications if they are available. your vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
CAUTION!
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline. DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe- Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im- and driveability problems and may damage critical
prove air quality. fuel system components.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-

lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro- Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
fuel system components.
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from It is even more important to look for gasolines without
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Metha- MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
nol. higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT In Gasoline MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is lated gasolines.
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
Materials Added to Fuel
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug 5
detergents or other additives are not needed under
life and reduces emission system performance in some
normal conditions and would result in additional cost.
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
Therefore you should not have to add anything to the
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
fuel.
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT.
Fuel System Cautions some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
CAUTION! Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicles The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
performance: octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance the responsibility of the manufacturer.
and damage the emission control system. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to against you.
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ADDING FUEL

Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
WARNING!
As a reminder, a fuel icon with an arrow
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. indicating which side of the vehicle the fuel
To prevent carbon monoxide poisoning DO NOT inhale filler door is located on, is located in the
exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and instrument cluster, just below the Fuel Gage.
odorless gas which can kill.
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
NEVER run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
NEVER sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle. 5
extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with
the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the NOTE: The drivers side sliding door cannot be opened
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
while the fuel door is open. This feature operates only
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. when the sliding door is fully closed prior to opening the
Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. fuel door.
Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent
carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from
entering the vehicle.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off, the

CAUTION!
fuel tank is full.
Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys-
tem could result from using an improper fuel tank WARNING!
filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
impurities into the fuel system and may cause the
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on due to
tank filled.
fuel vapors escaping from the system.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
CAUTION! tions and will cause the malfunction indicator
light to turn on.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not top
off the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a clicking
If the gASCAP message is displayed in the instrument
sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is
cluster, this signifies a leak or change in the evapora-
properly tightened.
tive system is detected. Sometimes this is the result of
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the Malfunc- a loosely fitting (or possibly damaged) filler cap.
tion Indicator Light may come on. Be sure the gas cap Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled. odometer reset button to turn the gASCAP message
off.
WARNING! 5
Make sure that the fuel filler cap is tightened each time
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a the vehicle is refueled.
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You If the problem continues, the message will appear the
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the next time the vehicle is started. See your authorized
ground while filling. dealer service center as soon as possible. See Section 7
of this manual for more information.
FLEXIBLE FUEL 3.3L ENGINES ONLY

E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel Ve-
hicles (FFV) only. These vehicles can be identified by the
unique fuel filler door label that states: Ethanol (E-85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline only powered vehicles.
E-85 Fuel Cap

ETHANOL FUEL (E-85)

CAUTION!
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
Only vehicles with the E-85 Decal and/or fuel filler 15% unleaded gasoline.
door label can operate on E-85.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could

cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the 5
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
these two.
E-85 Badge
For best results, a refueling pattern that alternates be- Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
tween E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be avoided. (FFV) E-85 and Gasoline Vehicles
When you do switch fuels, it is recommended that: FFV vehicles operated on E85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
in Mopar engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
than one-quarter full
DaimlerChrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufac-
you do not add less than 5 gal (19 L) when refueling turer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified
and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS-
you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
6395. MS-6395 contains additional requirements, devel-
a period of at least five minutes
oped during extensive fleet testing, to provide additional
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard protection to DaimlerChrysler Corporation engines. Use
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the specification
during warm up. MS-6395.
NOTE: When the ambient temperature is above 90F Starting
(32C), you may experience hard starting and rough idle The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
following start-up even if the above recommendations when ambient temperatures fall below 0F (-18C). In the
are followed. range of 0F (-18C) to 32F (0C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and

CAUTION!
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up. Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
Cruising Range compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than
gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel con-
sumption. You can expect your MPG and your driving Maintenance
range to decrease by about 30% compared to gasoline If you operate the vehicle using E-85 fuel, follow the
operation. maintenance schedule section of this manual.
5
Replacement Parts CAUTION!
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com- vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
patible parts. may affect driveability.
VEHICLE LOADING Vehicle Certification Label

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin- Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to
istration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification the drivers door pillar.
label affixed to the drivers side door or pillar.
The label contains the following information:
Name of manufacturer
Month and year of manufacture
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Type of Vehicle
Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
Vehicle Certification Label Location
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not exceed the The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
specified GVWR and GAWR. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Tire Size

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
GVWR.
Rim Size
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear listed.
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
Inflation Pressure
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or 5
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
rear GAWR.
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
WARNING! Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
Because the front wheels drive and steer the vehicle, of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
it is important that you do not exceed the maximum capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
control of the vehicle and have an accident. commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Overloading Loading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory weight, axle by axle and side by side. Store heavier items
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and front down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
and rear GAWR. evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
it is not over the GVWR.
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle the brakes operate.
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicles
GVWR.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR

or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
5
A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that
neither the GVWR or the GAWR capacities have been LOADING TABLE EXAMPLE ONLY
exceeded. Front Axle Rear Axle
Empty Weight 2,140 lbs (971 kg) 1,470 lbs (667 kg)
Load (Driver, 360 lbs (163 kg) 980 lbs (445 kg)
passengers, and
cargo/luggage)
TOTAL 2,500 lbs (1 134 kg) 2,450 lbs (1 111 kg)
GAWR 2,544 lbs (1 154 kg) 2,544 lbs (1 154 kg)
A loaded vehicle is shown in the above table. Note that Common Towing Definitions
neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been The following trailer towing-related definitions will as-
exceeded. sist you in understanding the following information:
NOTE: Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label at- Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
tached to the rear of the drivers door for your vehicles The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
GVWR and GAWRs. This table is only an example. This includes driver, passengers, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight. The total load must be limited so
TRAILER TOWING that you do not exceed the GVWR.
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re- The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
safely as possible. (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
loaded and ready for operation condition. The recom-
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve- trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
hicles used for trailer towing. must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) Trailer Tongue Weight (TW)

The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings in- more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
clude a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a as part of the load on your vehicle.
driver).
Frontal Area
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear a trailer.
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles 5
Trailer Sway Control
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
rear GAWR.
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
WARNING!
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum swaying motions while traveling.
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition Weight-Carrying Hitch
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
control of the vehicle and have an accident. weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. This type of
hitch is the most popular on the market today and is

WARNING!
commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever- system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used formance, and could result in an accident.
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
tow vehicles front axle and the trailers axle(s). When with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with an autho-
used in accordance with the manufacturers directions, it rized hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent authorized Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing information.
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW), and may be required depending on Ve-
hicle and Trailer configuration/loading to comply with
gross axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
Weight Distributing Hitch System Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System

Trailer Hitch Classifications Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Your vehicle may be factory-equipped for safe towing of Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional Standards
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See an authorized dealer for
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
package content.
Class II - Medium 3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
The following chart provides the industry standard for Duty
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the Class IV - Extra 10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Heavy Duty
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings) chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

The Trailer Towing Weights Chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for a given drivetrain.
GCWR (Gross Com-
Engine/Transaxle bined Wt. Rating) Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt.
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg) 22 sq ft (2.0 sq m) Up to 2 persons & Luggage 180 lbs (82 kg)
1,800 lbs (816 kg)
3.3L, 3.8L and 4.0L / 3 to 5 persons & Luggage 1,350 135 lbs (61 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg) 22 sq ft (2.0 sq m) lbs (612 kg)
Automatic
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg) 22 sq ft (2.0 sq m) 6 to 7 persons & Luggage 1,000 100 lbs (45 kg)
lbs (454 kg) 5
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) Up to 2 persons & Luggage 380 lbs (172 kg)
3,800 lbs (1 723 kg)1
3.8L and 4.0L
/Automatic (with 9,000 lbs (4 082 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3 to 5 persons & Luggage 3,350 335 lbs (152 kg)
lbs (1 519 kg)1
trailer tow package)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 6 to 7 persons & Luggage 3,000 300 lbs (136 kg)
lbs (1 360 kg)1
1
For vehicles equipped with Fold-in-Floor seating, the Gross Trailer Weight must be reduced by 100 lbs (45 kg). Refer to
local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to the TireSafety Infor-
mation Section in this manual.
Trailer and Trailer Tongue Weight

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to severely sway side-to-side,
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the Towing Requirements

weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv-
etrain components, the following guidelines are recom-
Trailer tongue weight
mended:
Weight of any other type of cargo/luggage or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle CAUTION!
Weight of the driver and all passengers Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 mi (805 km)
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional vehicle. 5
factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed During the first 500 mi (805 km) of trailer towing,
options, must be considered as part of the total load on limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
your vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
placard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this
manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
and cargo for your vehicle. manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR
or GCWR ratings.
Safety chains must always be used between your

WARNING!
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident. frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
as safe as possible: slack for turning corners.
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
and will not shift during travel. When trailering When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to PARK. Always, block or chock the trailer wheels.
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and GCWR must not be exceeded.
have an accident.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over- ratings are not exceeded:
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
1. GVWR
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas- 2. GTW
sis structure or tires.
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for that trailer hitch. When replacing tires refer to the TiresGeneral Infor-
(This requirement may limit the ability to always mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires
achieve the 10% to 15% range of trailer tongue weight for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
as a percentage of total trailer weight.) with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements Tires
Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire. Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe 5
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
personal injury.
TiresGeneral Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures. An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
pressures before trailer usage. a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage brake controller is not required.
before towing a trailer. Refer to the TiresGeneral Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure. lbs (907 kg).
Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring

CAUTION!
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they motoring safety.
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin or a
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
WARNING! wiring harness.
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicles hy- The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys- but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes Refer to the following four-pin connector and seven-pin
when you need them and could have an accident. connector illustrations.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
Four-Pin Connector Seven-Pin Connector

Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Towing Tips Automatic Transmission NOTE:

The DRIVE gear can be selected when towing. However, Check the automatic transmission fluid level before
if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, move the gear towing.
selector lever into third gear (with four-speed transmis-
The six-speed automatic transmission is sealed and
sion) or fifth gear (with six-speed transmission).
requires an authorized dealer service center to check
NOTE: Moving the gear selector lever into third gear the transmission fluid.
(with four-speed transmission) or fifth gear (with six-
Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control (If
speed transmission) while operating the vehicle under
Equipped)
heavy operating conditions will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift- Dont use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
ing and heat build up. This action will also provide better
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
engine braking.
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be you can get back to cruising speed.
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to the Main-
maximize fuel efficiency.
tenance Schedule in Section 8 of this manual for trans-
mission fluid change intervals.
Towing Tips Cooling System RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- MOTORHOME, ETC.)
heating, take the following actions:
CAUTION!
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission Towing this vehicle behind another vehicle (flat-
gear selector lever in NEUTRAL but do not increase towing with all four wheels on the ground) IS NOT
engine idle speed. RECOMMENDED.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed. 5
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four
Air Conditioning wheels are off the ground.
Turn off temporarily.
Refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more informa-
tion.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Towing With The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 6
410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flash-
The hazard flasher switch is located in the center of ers may wear down your battery.
the instrument panel below the radio.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
To engage the Hazard Warning Flashers, depress the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch on the instrument panel. When the Hazard Warn- potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
ing Switch is activated, all directional turn signals will tion.
flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emer-
gency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the On the highways Slow down.
flashers. In city traffic While stopped, shift the transmission
This is an emergency warning system and should not be gear selector lever into NEUTRAL, but do not increase
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your engine idle speed.
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
other motorists. an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
though the ignition switch is OFF. removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
WARNING!
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system. A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
CAUTION! coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
hood yourself, see Section 7, Maintenance, of this
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads H, pull
manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
H, turn the engine off immediately, and call for 6
service.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!
WARNING! For vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating, if it
is necessary to retrieve the spare tire from under the
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
vehicle on the side of the vehicle close to moving
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
danger of being hit.
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need
to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift. Jack Location
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing The jack, jack handle and winch handle tools are stowed
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the behind the rear left side trim panel in the rear cargo area.
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should Turn the two cover latches to release the cover.
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Spare Tire Removal

For vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating, the spare
tire is stowed inside a protective cover located under the
center of the vehicle by means of a cable winch mecha-
nism. The spare tire drive nut is located on the floor,
under a plastic cap at the front of the floor console.
NOTE: The base console, if equipped, must be removed
to raise and lower the spare tire. Refer to Console
Features in Section 3, for the console removal procedure.
The tool pouch contains three pieces and can be as-
sembled into a Spare Tire Hook; to remove the compact 6
Rear Compartment Features spare tire/cover assembly from under the vehicle, or a
1 - Tie Down 5 - Liftgate Close Switch Winch T Handle; to raise/lower the compact spare
2 - Switch Bank 6 - Bag Holders tire/cover assembly.
3 - Tire Jack/Handle 7 - Child Seat LATCH Anchor
4 - Cubby/Speaker 8 - Rechargeable Flash Light
Remove the pouch containing the scissors jack, jack

handle, and tools.
Preparations For Jacking

Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK. Turn OFF the ignition.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally oppo-
site the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being jacked.
Stow n Go Tools
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to

help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
Jack Warning Label the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
6
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in park; a manual transmission in
reverse.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by

WARNING!
turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help on the ground.
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: 2. To remove the compact spare tire/cover assembly,
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a assemble the winch handle extensions to form a T and
jack. fit the winch T handle over the drive nut. Rotate the
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a nut to the left until the winch mechanism stops turning
jack. freely. This will allow enough slack in the cable to allow
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. you to pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
CAUTION!
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
careful of motor traffic. winch T handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are securely power tools is not recommended and can damage the
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem winch.
facing the ground.
Turn on the Hazard warning flasher.
3. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the NOTE: If either front tire is flat, it may be necessary to
Spare Tire Hook and pull the compact spare tire/cover jack up the vehicle to remove the compact spare tire/
assembly from under the vehicle. cover assembly from under the vehicle. Refer to jack
engagement locations in the following steps for proper
WARNING! jack placement.
Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The

vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift. 6
Spare Tire Hook & Removal

4. When the compact spare tire/cover assembly is clear 5. There are two jack engagement locations on each side
of the vehicle, stand the tire/cover assembly upright and of the vehicle body. These locations are on the sill flange
remove the wheel spacer by squeezing the two retaining of the vehicle body.
tabs together.
NOTE: Rear jack location is between a pair of down-
standing tabs on the sill flange of the vehicle body.
Front jack location is on the sill flange of the vehicle body
and is located 6 in. (150 mm) from door edge.
Squeezing Winch Retainer Tabs

Jacking Locations
CAUTION! WARNING!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
locations other than those indicated in Step 5. the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn to the
right until the jack head is properly engaged in the
described location. Do not raise the vehicle until you are 8. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with wheel
sure the jack is securely engaged. covers, remove the cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the 9. Install the compact spare tire. Lightly tighten the lug
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
provides maximum stability. lowered.
NOTE: Do not install the wheel cover on the compact
spare.
Do not use a hammer or force to install the wheel covers.
10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the 13. Place the deflated (flat) tire and compact spare tire
left. cover assembly in the rear cargo area. Do not stow the
deflated tire in the spare tire location. Have the full
11. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
sized tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. Correct 14. Stow the cable and wheel spacer before driving the
wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs (130 Nm). If in doubt vehicle. Reassemble the winch handle extensions to form
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a a T and fit the winch T handle over the drive nut.
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service Rotate the nut to the right until the winch mechanism
station. clicks at least three times.
12. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position. 15. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle tools.
6
WARNING! 16. Check the compact spare tire pressure as soon as
possible. Correct pressure as required.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or Wheel Nuts
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve- All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
repaired or replaced immediately. especially important during the first few hundred miles
of operation, and after each time a tire is changed, to

WARNING!
allow the wheel nuts to become properly set. All nuts
should first be firmly seated against the wheel. The nuts A loose compact spare tire/cover assembly, thrown
should then be tightened to recommended torque. forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger
Tighten the nuts to final torque in increments. Progress the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the com-
around the bolt circle, tightening the nut opposite to the pact spare tire with the cover assembly in the place
nut just previously tightened until final torque is provided.
achieved. Recommended torque is 95 ft lbs (130 Nm).
Secure The Spare Tire As Follows:
1. To stow the compact spare tire/cover assembly on CAUTION!
vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating, assemble the
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
winch handle extensions to form a T and fit the winch
winch T handle only. Use of an air wrench or other
T handle over the drive nut. Rotate the nut to the left
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
until the winch mechanism stops turning freely. This will
winch.
allow enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the
wheel spacer out from under the vehicle.
2. Assemble the winch handle extensions to form the

WARNING!
Spare Tire Hook and pull the wheel spacer from under
the vehicle. Verify that both retainer tabs of the wheel spacer
3. Turn the compact spare tire so that the valve stem is have been properly extended through the center of
down and place the tire into the spare tire cover assem- the wheel and spare tire cover assembly. Failure to
bly. Slide the wheel spacer through the center of the properly engage both retainer tabs could result in
wheel and spare tire cover assembly so that the two loss of the spare tire & cover assembly, which will
retainer tabs snap out and engage the spare tire cover on cause vehicle damage and may cause loss of control
the opposite side. of the vehicle.
CAUTION! 6
4. Using the winch T handle, rotate the drive nut to the
The compact spare tire cover assembly must be used right until the compact spare tire/cover assembly is
when the compact spare tire is stored. Failure to use drawn into place against the underside of the vehicle.
this cover could drastically reduce the life of the 5. Continue to rotate the nut to the right until you hear
compact spare tire. the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be
overtightened. Check under the vehicle to ensure the
compact spare tire/cover assembly is positioned cor-
rectly against the underside of the vehicle.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
For vehicles equipped with Stow n Go seating, the
Winch Mechanism is designed specifically to stow a DO NOT attempt to push or tow the vehicle to get it started. Vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way.
COMPACT Spare Tire ONLY. Do not attempt to use Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine
has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
the Winch to stow the Full Size Flat Tire, or any
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
other Full Size Tire. Vehicle damage may result. obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous
if done improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; DO NOT allow battery fluid to
contact eyes, skin or clothing. Dont lean over battery when attaching
clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in the
eyes or on the skin, flush the contaminated area immediately with large
quantities of water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep
all flames or sparks away from the vent holes. DO NOT use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 volts.
During cold weather when temperatures are below freezing point, elec-
trolyte in a discharged battery may freeze. DO NOT attempt jump-starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The battery temperature
must be brought up above freezing point before attempting jump-start.
Take special care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is
raised. The cooling fan is electrically operated and can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be hurt by the fan.
When jump-starting, proceed as follows:

WARNING!
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an DO NOT permit vehicles to touch each other as this
inadvertent electrical contact. could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
2. When a boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach and
without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake, 5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
place the automatic transmission selector lever into of the booster battery, and then to the engine of the
PARK and turn the ignition switch to the OFF position for vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure there is a
both vehicles. good contact on the engine.
6
3. Turn OFF the heater, radio and all unnecessary elec-
trical loads. WARNING!
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive DO NOT connect the cable to the negative post of the
terminal of the discharged battery. Connect the other end discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark could
of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster cause the battery to explode.
battery.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
7. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
front wheels. Then shift the gear selector lever back and
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
forth between REVERSE and DRIVE. Usually the least
amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the
WARNING!
rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most
Any procedure other than the jump-starting process effective.
listed could result in:
WARNING!
Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out
the battery vent; Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
Personal injury or property damage due to battery by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
explosion; failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicles wheels faster than 35 mph (55
Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or km/h) when you are stuck. And dont let anyone near a
of immobilized vehicle. spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION! CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels front fascia will result.
above 35 mph (55 km/h). Always use wheel lift equipment when towing
from the front. The only other approved method of
towing is with a flat bed truck.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
Towing With The Ignition Key the rear sheet metal, liftgate and fascia will occur.
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi- 6
tions: The gear selector lever must be in NEUTRAL, the
distance to be traveled must not exceed 100 mi (160 km),
and the towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72
km/h). Exceeding these towing limits may cause a trans-
mission geartrain failure. If the transmission is not op-
erative, or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 100 mi
(160 km), the vehicle must be towed with the front
wheels off the ground.
Towing Without The Ignition Key

CAUTION!
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
Do not push or tow this vehicle with another with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only ap-
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans- proved method of towing with out the ignition key is
mission may result. with a flat bed truck. Proper towing equipment is neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the OFF position, not in Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
the LOCK or ACC positions. towing with all four wheels on the ground)
Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, is only permitted within the limitations
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed described in this section.
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With
position, not the ACC position. Make certain the trans-
A Tow Dolly
mission remains in NEUTRAL.
The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow a
front wheel drive vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage
may occur.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3.3L Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
3.8L Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
4.0L Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II . . . . . . . . 435 Drive Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message Gascap . . . . 436 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 7
Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Authorized Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Appearance Care And Protection

From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cup Holders . . 471
Steering Shaft Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Fuses/Totally Integrated Power Module
Drive Shaft Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
(TIPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 459
High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID)
Fuel System Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 Quad Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Front Park/Turn Signal And Side
Marker Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Front And Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Front Side Marker Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 487
And Backup Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) . . . 485
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
7
3.3L ENGINE COMPARTMENT

7

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II

CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica-
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic tor Light on could cause further damage to the
transmission control systems. When these systems are emission control system. It could also affect fuel
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
sions well within current government regulations. formed.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system If the Malfunction Indicator Light is flashing
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light. It will while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
also store diagnostic codes and other information to verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Immediate service is required.
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not 7
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message gASCAP EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Should the Loose Fuel Filler Cap or gASCAP mes- PROGRAMS
sage appear, there may be a problem in the evaporative In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
system. Before taking the vehicle into an authorized an inspection of this vehicles emissions control system.
dealer, check first to see if the fuel filler cap is possibly Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A loose fuel
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
filler cap message will be displayed in the instrument
nance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
tightened. Press the odometer reset button to turn the
is ready for testing.
message off. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. If the problem Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the system may not be ready if the vehicle was recently
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the prob- serviced, recently had a dead battery, or a battery replace-
lem will turn the MIL light off. Take your vehicle in to an ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
authorized dealer. ready for the I/M test, the vehicle may fail the test.
This vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, the ignition key or start the engine. This means that the
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To vehicles OBD II system is not ready and you should
check if this vehicles OBD II system is ready, you must not proceed to the I/M station.
do the following:
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
1. Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch. illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that the vehicles OBD II
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
system is ready, and you can proceed to the I/M
or start the engine.
station.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
If the OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
this test over.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If this vehicle was
4. As soon as you turn the ignition key to the ON recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of you may need to do nothing more than drive the vehicle
a normal bulb check. as you normally would in order for the OBD II system to 7
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
indicate that the system is now ready.
happen:
Regardless of whether the vehicles OBD II system is
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ready or not ready, if the MIL is illuminated during
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
normal vehicle operation, you should have the vehicle
serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
can fail the vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
running. against you.
REPLACEMENT PARTS WARNING!

Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en- You can be badly injured working on or around a
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
caused by the use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturers you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
warranty. service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
AUTHORIZED DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these service manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ENGINE OIL

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
Checking Oil Level
services determined by the engineers who designed your
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
vehicle.
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
observed or suspected. improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at 7
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
Change Engine Oil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this
manual for information on this system.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
Engine Oil Dipstick recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
CAUTION!
MS-6395.
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to
Identification Symbol the Engine Compartment illustration in this section.
This symbol means that the oil has
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
been certified by the American
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
Petroleum Institute (API). The
ber should not be used.
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils. Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) 4.0 Liter
Engines
SAE 10W-30 engine oil is preferred for all operating
temperatures. The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) 3.3L & 3.8L
Gasoline Engines Lubricants which DO NOT have both, the engine oil
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade 7
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature number should not be used.
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your vehicle.
Synthetic Engine Oils station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom- where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom- your area.
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
ENGINE OIL FILTER
are followed.
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
Materials Added to Engine Oil oil change.
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-
Engine Oil Filter Selection
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
The manufacturers engines have a full-flow type oil
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
tives.
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
Disposing of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and filter and are recommended.
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
DRIVE BELT ENGINE AIR CLEANER

At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this
replace the drive belt with a new drive belt. manual for engine air cleaner filter maintenance inter-
vals.
NOTE: The drive belt must be routed correctly to ensure
proper drive function. NOTE: Be sure to follow the dusty or off-road condi-
tions maintenance interval if applicable.
SPARK PLUGS
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-
WARNING!
mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-
stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
plug. Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata- backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
lytic converter. For proper type of replacement spark cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
plugs, refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for 7
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
correct spark plug type. near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
catalyst as an emission control device. vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
damage. malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:

WARNING!
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in
materials that can burn. Such materials might be motion.
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the
where your exhaust system can contact anything that vehicle.
can burn. Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
7
vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
tune-up to manufacturers specifications, should be ob-
tained immediately.
Exhaust System
WARNING!
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
system. monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- manual.
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, The top of the MAINTENANCE-FREE battery is perma-
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised nently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. periodic maintenance required.
WARNING! CAUTION!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can It is essential when replacing the cables on the
burn or even blind you. Dont allow battery fluid battery that the positive cable is attached to the
to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Dont lean positive post and the negative cable is attached to
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme- tive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
diately with large amounts of water. battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep terminal posts and free of corrosion.
flame or sparks away from the battery. Dont use a If a fast charger is used while the battery is in
booster battery or any other booster source with an the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
output greater than 12 volts. Dont allow cable before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
clamps to touch each other. use a fast charger to provide starting voltage. 7
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE

WARNING!
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
at the start of each warm season. This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a system tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
performance check. Drive belt tension should also be flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
checked at this time. unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling

WARNING!
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Do not remove the A/C Air Filter while the blower is
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- operating or personal injury may result.
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by an authorized dealer or other an
authorized service facility using recovery and recycling The A/C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
equipment. the glove box. Perform the following procedure to re-
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System place the filter:
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres- 1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the
A/C Air Filter If Equipped door.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this 7
manual for A/C Air Filter service intervals. 3. Pivot the glove box downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter 6. Install the A/C Air Filter with the arrow on the filter
cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover. pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C Air Filter is labeled with an arrow to

indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Rotate the glove box door back into position.

A/C Air Filter Replacement
5. Remove the A/C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are for correct fluid type.
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
FRONT SUSPENSION BALL JOINTS
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
The front suspension ball joints are permanently sealed.
rized DaimlerChrysler Dealership.
No regular maintenance is required for these compo-
nents.
WARNING!
STEERING SHAFT SEAL
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and The steering shaft seal, at the point where the shaft passes
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving through the bulkhead, is lubricated when it is installed. If
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do the seal becomes noisy when the steering shaft is turned,
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended it should be lubricated with a multipurpose grease. 7
power steering fluid. Mopar multipurpose lubricant is recommended.
Steering Linkage
The tie rod end ball joints are permanently lubricated and
do not require periodic maintenance.
DRIVE SHAFT UNIVERSAL JOINTS lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Your vehicle has constant velocity universal joints. Peri- Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
odic lubrication of these joints is not required. However, components to ensure proper function. When performing
the joint boots should be inspected for external leakage or other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
damage when other maintenance is performed. If leakage nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
or damage is evident, the universal joint boot and grease
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
should be replaced immediately.
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
Continued operation could result in failure of the univer- amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock
sal joint due to water and dirt contamination of the Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
grease. This would require complete replacement of the
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
joint assembly.
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
BODY LUBRICATION should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accu-
seat tracks, doors, liftgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, mulations of salt or road film.
should be lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from

WARNING!
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. Commercially available windshield washer solvents
Windshield and Rear Window Washers are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the must be exercised when filling or working around
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the engine the washer solution.
compartment and should be checked for fluid level at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a
system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water. few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Mopar All
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid Weather Windshield Washer Solution, used with water as
when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates. directed on the container, aids cleaning action, reduces
the freezing point to avoid line clogging, and is not
7
harmful to paint or trim.
COOLING SYSTEM Coolant Checks

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
WARNING! months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis- system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
controlled and can start at anytime the ignition spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
switch is in the ON position. face of the condenser.
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
steam coming from under the hood, dont open the at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never leaks.
try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator is hot. With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE-

CAUTION!
MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. Mixing of coolants other than specified Hybrid Or-
Cooling System Drain, Flush and Refill ganic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolants,
The system should be drained, flushed, and refilled at the may result in engine damage and may decrease
intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedule in Sec- corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant is intro-
tion 8 of this manual. duced into the cooling system in an emergency, it
should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount as possible.
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
antifreeze solution. rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and 7
Selection Of Coolant may plug the radiator.
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
coolant type.
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
Adding Coolant The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
Please note that it is the owners responsibility to main-
coolant can be used up to five years or 102,000 mi (170
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
extended maintenance period, it is important that you
the vehicle is operated.
use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant. engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% rec-
ommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant Five Year/ Cooling System Pressure Cap
100,000 mi (160 934 km) Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
Additive Technology), or equivalent, in water should be coolant, and to ensure that coolant will return to the
used. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
temperatures below 34F (37C ) are anticipated.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children

WARNING!
do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in open
The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre- ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to Coolant Level
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald- determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while engine cold, the level of the coolant in the coolant
the system is hot or under pressure. recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one on the bottle.
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en- The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
gine damage may result. no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for 7
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
Disposal of Used Coolant
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant is a regulated
be checked once a month.
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
not overfill. added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
Points To Remember
If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
sure tested for leaks.
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
enter the radiator. corrosion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle. Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may present.
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
mileage, and increased emissions.
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.
HOSES AND VACUUM/VAPOR HARNESSES
FUEL SYSTEM CONNECTIONS
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
The Electronic Fuel Injection high-pressure fuel systems
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
hoses and quick connect fittings have unique material
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
characteristics that provide adequate sealing and resist
sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
attack by deteriorated gasoline.
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
You are urged to use only the manufacture specified
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any
hoses with quick connect fittings, or their equivalent in 7
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing. It
heat source or moving component which may cause heat
is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick
damage or mechanical wear.
connect fittings that have been removed during service.
Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or Care should be taken in installing quick connect fittings
collapsed. to ensure they are properly installed and fully connected.
See your authorized dealer for service.
BRAKES cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake indicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention
system components should be inspected periodically. should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest
Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte- to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.
nance Schedules.
Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
WARNING!
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting present.
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and NOTE: Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid,
possible brake damage. You wouldnt have your full and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera-
braking capacity in an emergency. tions to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings.
Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not
necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of
Brake And Power Steering Hoses hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during
When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance, vehicle operation), should be noted before hose is re-
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of placed based on leakage.
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be performed Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
whenever the brake system is serviced and every engine the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
oil change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface FULL mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots. If there is any evidence
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be
cause leaking in the system.
replaced immediately! Eventual deterioration of the hose
can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure. Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
WARNING! brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure. leak and a checkup may be needed.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer
hoses replaced immediately. to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid 7
type.
Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check

The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing underhood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
WARNING! CAUTION!
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid all brake seal components could be
brake fluid catching fire. damaged causing partial or complete brake failure.
Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling
point than the recommended MOPAR DOT 3 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
product or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to The automatic transaxle and differential assembly are
FMVSS specification may result in sudden brake contained within a single housing.
failure during hard prolonged braking. You could
have an accident. The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed transaxle and the fluid.
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture. All FourSpeed automatic transaxles are equipped with a
conventional filler tube and dipstick. If fluid is added, it
should be added through the filler tube.
All six speed transaxles are equipped with a capped

CAUTION!
dipstick tube, it is sealed and should not be tampered
with. Your authorized dealer has the necessary tools to Using a transaxle fluid other than the manufacturers
ensure that the fluid level is set properly. recommended fluid may cause deterioration in trans-
Selection of Lubricant axle shift quality and/or torque converter shudder.
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the Using a transaxle fluid other than the manufacturers
transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance. Use recommended fluid will result in more frequent
only manufacturers recommended transaxle fluid; refer fluid and filter changes. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
type. It is important that the transaxle fluid be main-
tained at the prescribed level using the recommended
fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any trans- Fluid Level Check 3.8L and 4.0L Engines with
Six-Speed Automatic Transaxle If Equipped
axle; only the approved lubricant may be used.
The Six-Speed automatic transaxle is a sealed unit and
7
has no dipstick. See your authorized dealer to have the
transaxle fluid checked or serviced.
Fluid Level Check 3.3L Engine with Four-Speed 4. Place the gear selector lever momentarily in each gear
Automatic Transaxle If Equipped position ending with the lever in PARK. Wipe the area
The dipstick is located just behind the radiator, lower around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of
right side. dirt entering the transaxle.
5. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or warm. Hot fluid is approximately 180F (82C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has
been driven at least 15 miles (24 km). The fluid cannot be
comfortably held between the finger tips. Cold is when
the fluid is below 80F (27C).
To properly check the automatic transaxle fluid level, the
following procedure must be used: 6. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated.
Remove dipstick and note reading.
1. The vehicle must be on level ground.
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
2. The engine should be running at curb idle speed for a crosshatched area marked HOT (between the upper
minimum of 60 seconds. two holes in the dipstick).
3. Fully apply parking brake. b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked COLD.
If the fluid level indicates low, add sufficient fluid to Special Additives
bring to the proper level. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
CAUTION! mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transaxle. The only exception to this policy is
Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transaxle can the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In
cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from addition, avoid using transaxle sealers as they may
entering the transaxle after checking or replenishing adversely affect seals.
fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is reseated
properly. FRONT AND REAR WHEEL BEARINGS
Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed.
No regular maintenance is required for these compo-
Fluid and Filter Changes nents.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 of this APPEARANCE CARE AND PROTECTION FROM 7
manual for the recommended transaxle fluid and filter CORROSION
change intervals.
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
If the transaxle is disassembled for any reason, the fluid Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
and filter should be changed. graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly Insects, tree sap and tar
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
Washing
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection. Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
clear water.
resistance built into your vehicle.
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
What Causes Corrosion?
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
and Tar Remover to remove.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
The most common causes are:
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation scratch the paint.
Stone and gravel impact
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
finish. considered the responsibility of the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
CAUTION!
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
metal and painted surfaces. sibility of the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
Special Care packaged and sealed.
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
7
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
a month.
Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and match the color of your vehicle.
open.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care use protectants or other products, which may cause
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a restore the low glare surface.
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
Cleaning Interior Trim
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Mopar
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a
cloth, a damp cloth with Mopar Total Clean, then
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
Mopar Spot & Stain Remover if absolutely necessary. Do
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only
not use harsh cleaners or Armorall. Use Mopar Total
Mopar or equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven
Clean to clean vinyl upholstery
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels Cleaning Leather Upholstery
protective finish. Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Interior Care
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
Instrument Panel Surfaces
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean or a mild
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
required to maintain the original condition.
For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose
WARNING! Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen-
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. tials products.
Cleaning High Gloss Front Door and Pillar
Appliques
YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If When cleaning the front door B-pillar appliques, care 7
Equipped must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following
manner: 1. Remove all dirt with a wet soft rag. A mild soap
solution may be used, do not use high alcohol content or
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting abrasive cleaners. Glass cleaners are not recommended. If
with a clean, dry towel. soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
2. To maintain the high gloss shine, apply a scratch and Glass Surfaces
swirl remover onto a damp cloth and apply to door All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
applique. Rub the applique with a firm pressure then buff with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial
lightly with a clean cotton cloth until a high gloss shine is household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
achieved. cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
Cleaning Headlights
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lightweight
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may
and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass head-
scratch the elements.
lights.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
directly on the mirror.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
lowed by rinsing.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cup Holders
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
Removal
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
Pull the flexible liner from the cup holder drawer;
rag.
starting at one edge to ease removal.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Cleaning
Seat Belt Maintenance The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you may follow
Do not bleach, dye or clean the seatbelts with chemical the cleaning procedure below.
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap water and
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap. Let soak for
If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or approximately 30 minutes. After 30 minutes pull the liner
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to from the water and dip it back into the water about six
wash them. times. This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse the 7
liner thoroughly under warm running water. Shake the
Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if
excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces
the buckles do not work properly.
with a clean soft cloth.
Installation
Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and press the
liner into place so that the retention tabs seat into the
corresponding openings in the drawer.
FUSES/TOTALLY INTEGRATED POWER MODULE

(TIPM)
The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is located
in the engine compartment near the battery. This center
contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A label that
identifies each component may be printed or embossed
on the inside of the cover.
TIPM Location
The numbers inside the TIPM cover correspond to the FUSES/TIPM

following table. Cartridge Mini
Cavity Description
FUSES/TIPM Fuse Fuse
Cartridge Mini J8 40 Amp Power Memory Seat (If
Cavity Description
Fuse Fuse Green Equipped)
J1 40 Amp Power Folding Seat J9 40 Amp PZEV Motor/Flex Fuel
Green Green
J2 30 Amp Power Liftgate Module J10 30 Amp Headlamp Wash Relay/
Pink Pink Manual Tuning Valve
J3 40 Amp Rear Door Module (RR J11 30 Amp Power Sliding Door Mod-
Green Door Node) Pink ule
J4 25 Amp Driver Door Node J13 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
Natural Yellow Main 7
J5 25 Amp Passenger Door Node J14 40 Amp Rear Window Defogger
Natural Green
J6 40 Amp Anti-Lock Brake System J15 30 Amp Rear Blower
Green (ABS) Pump/ESP Pink
J7 30 Amp Anti-Lock Brake System J17 40 Amp Starter Solenoid
Pink (ABS) Valve Green
FUSES/TIPM FUSES/TIPM
Cartridge Mini Cartridge Mini
Cavity Description Cavity Description
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
J18 20 Amp Powertrain Control Mod- M3 20 Amp
Yellow ule (PCM) Trans Range Yellow
J19 60 Amp Radiator Fan M4 10 Amp Trailer Tow
Yellow Red
J20 30 Amp Front Wiper LO/HI M5 25 Amp Inverter
Pink Natural
J21 20 Amp Front/Rear Washer M6 20 Amp
Yellow Yellow
J22 25 Amp Sunroof Module M7 20 Amp Power Outlet #2 (BATT/
Natural Yellow ACC SELECT)
M1 15 Amp Center High Mounted M8 20 Amp Front Heated Seat (If
Blue Stop Light (CHMSL)/ Yellow Equipped)
Brake Switch M9 20 Amp Rear Heated Seat (If
M2 20 Amp Trailer Lighting Yellow Equipped)
Yellow
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
M10 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw Ve- M13 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw
Yellow hicle Entertainment Sys- Yellow Cabin Compartment Node
tem (IOD-VES), Satellite (IOD-CCN), Wireless Con-
Digital Audio Receiver trol Module (WCM), SI-
(SDARS), DVD, Hands- REN, Clock Module (CLK
Free Module (HFM), Uni- MOD), Multi-Function
versal Garage Door Control Switch (MULTI-
Opener (UGDO), Vanity FCTN SW)
Lamp (VANITY LP) M14 20 Amp Trailer Tow (Export Only)
M11 10 Amp (Ignition Off Draw) IOD- Yellow
Red HVAC/ATC, MW SENSR, 7
Underhood Lamp (UH
LMP)
M12 30 Amp Amplifier (AMP)
Green
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
M15 20 Amp COL MOD, IR SNS, M16 10 Amp Occupant Restraint
Yellow Heater Ventilation, Air Red Controller/Occupant
Conditioning/Automatic Classification Module
Temperature Control (ORC/OCM)
(HVAC/ATC), Rear View M17 15 Amp Left Tail/License/Park
Mirror (RR VW MIR), Blue Lamp (LT-TAIL/LIC/PRK
Cabin Compartment Node LMP)
(CCN), Transfer Case
Switch (T-CASE SW), M18 15 Amp Right Tail/Park/Run
RUN/ST, Multi-Function Blue Lamp (RT-TAIL/PRK/
Control Switch (MULTI- RUN LMP)
FTCN SW), Tire Pressure M19 25 Amp Auto Shut Down (ASD #1
Monitor (TPM), Glow Natural and #2)
Plug Module (GLW PLG M20 15 Amp Cabin Compartment Node
MOD) Export Diesel Blue Interior Light (CCN INT
Only LIGHT), Switch Bank (SW
BANK), Steering Control
Module (SCM)
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
M21 20 Amp Auto Shut Down (ASD M27 10 Amp Ignition Switch (IGN SW),
Yellow #3) Red Window Module (WIN
M22 10 Amp Right Horn (RT HORN MOD)
Red (HI/LOW) M28 10 Amp Next Generation Control-
M23 10 Amp Left Horn (LT HORN Red ler (NGC), Transmission
Red (HI/LOW) Feed (TRANS FEED),
J1962
M24 25 Amp Rear Wiper (REAR
Natural WIPER) M29 10 Amp Occupant Classification
Red Module (OCM)
M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump (FUEL PUMP),
Yellow Diesel Lift Pump (DSL M30 15 Amp Rear Wiper Module (RR
LIFT PUMP) Export Blue WIPER MOD), Power 7
Only Folding Mirror (PWR
FOLD MIR)
M26 10 Amp Power Mirror Switch
Red (PWR MIRR SW), Driver M31 20 Amp Back-Up Lamps (B/U
Window Switch (DRVR Yellow LAMPS)
WIND SW)
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
M32 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Con- M37 10 Amp Anti-Lock Brake System
Red troller (ORC), TT EU- Red (ABS), Electronic Stability
ROPE Program (ESP), Stop
M33 10 Amp Next Generation Control- Lamp Switch (STP LP
Red ler (NGC), Global Power- SW), Fuel Pump Rly Hi
train Engine Controller Control
(GPEC) M38 25 Amp Lock/Unlock Motors
M34 10 Amp Park Assist (PRK ASST), Natural (LOCK/UNLOCK MTRS)
Red Heater Ventilation, Air
Conditioning Module
(HVAC MOD), Headlamp
Wash (HDLP WASH),
Compass (COMPAS)
M35 10 Amp Heated Mirrors
Red
M36 20 Amp Power Outlet #3 (BATT)
Yellow
Amp circuit breaker located under the drivers seat. The

CAUTION!
Power Windows are fused by a 25 Amp circuit breaker
When installing the Integrated Power Module cover, located under the instrument panel near the steering
it is important to ensure the cover is properly column. If you experience temporary or permanent loss of
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may these systems, see your authorized dealer for service.
allow water to get into the Integrated Power Mod- VEHICLE STORAGE
ule, and possibly result in a electrical system failure. If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The You may do the following:
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may Remove the 20 Amp mini-fuse in the Integrated Power
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a Module labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD).
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 7
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
The Heated Mirrors, Lower Instrument Panel Power Outlet system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and Removable Floor Console, when in the front position and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate
are fused with self-resetting fuses that are only serviceable system lubrication to minimize the possibility of com-
by an authorized dealer. The power seats are fused by a 30 pressor damage when the system is started again.
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb Number

Backup, Tail, Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Center High-Mounted Stop Light . . . LED (See Note 1)
Center & Rear Dome Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 Fog Light If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
Center & Rear Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 Park/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . PY27 / 7W or 3757A
Front Door Courtesy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Front Header Reading Lights If Equipped . . . . . 578 Headlight (Low and High Beam Halogen) . . . . H11
Instrument Cluster Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC74 Headlight (HID If Equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . D1S
Liftgate Light(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Overhead Console Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . PC579 Note 1: The Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)
Removable Console Light If Equipped . . . . . . . 194 uses LED lights that are not serviceable separately. The
Visor Vanity Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6501966 CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly, see your
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for replace- authorized Dealer.
ment.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Dis-

charge Headlights (HID), when the headlights are turned
High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID) If
on, there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and
Equipped
becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as
The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
the system charges.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlight switch off and the key removed. Because of Quad Headlights
this, you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb
1. Raise the hood to access the high or low beam bulbs at
yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your vehicle to
the rear of the headlight housing.
an authorized dealer for service.
2. Release the two tabs on the side of the connector and
WARNING! remove the connector from the bulb.
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of 3. Twist the headlight bulb and pull the bulb from
headlight housing. 7
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights when the
headlight switch is turned ON. It may cause serious 4. Install the new headlight bulb and twist until locked
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced prop- into the headlight housing.
erly. See your authorized dealer for service.
Front Side Marker Lights

CAUTION!
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlight
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil housing.
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the NOTE: Access is somewhat limited. You may have to
bulb with rubbing alcohol. remove the inner fender well or remove the headlight
housing for bulb replacement.
2. Twist the socket and remove from the headlight hous-
5. Reconnect the wiring connector to bulb. ing, then pull the bulb out.
Front Park/Turn Signal and Side Marker Lights 3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
1. Raise the hood to access the rear of the headlight socket by twisting until locked into the headlight hous-
housing. ing.
2. Twist the turn signal socket and remove from the
headlight housing, then pull the bulb out.
3. Push the new bulb into the socket and reinstall the
socket by twisting until locked into the headlight hous-
ing.
Fog Lights
CAUTION!
NOTE: Access to the fog light bulb is from the rear of
the fascia. On the left rear side of the fascia, remove the Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
push pin and lower the hinged access door on the air contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
dam. bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
1. From behind the bumper fascia, or the access panel on
the air dam, twist the bulb counterclockwise, and remove
bulb. 2. Disconnect wire harness from the bulb.
3. Reconnect the wiring harness to the new bulb and
reinstall the bulb by twisting clockwise.
7
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, Side Marker and NOTE:

Backup Lights If a screwdriver is used, make sure a soft material is
1. Raise the liftgate. placed between the vehicle body and tool so not to
2. Remove the tail light assembly by removing the two scratch the paint.
screws from the inboard side. Use a fiber stick or similar The PRY location is best closest to the studs while
tool to gently pry the light on the outboard side to dislodging them separately.
disengage the two ball studs.
Removing Tail Light Assembly 1 Stop, Tail, Turn Signal bulb combo 2 Backup Bulb
3. Twist the socket and remove form the light assembly. License Light
The light for the license plate light is located under the
4. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
tailgate light bar and above the license plate.
5. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
1. Using a small screwdriver, press inward the locking
light assembly.
tab on the outboard side of the light assembly and pull
Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL) down on the light assembly for removal.
The CHMSL uses LED lights that are not serviceable
2. Twist and remove the socket from the light assembly
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
and pull the bulb out to remove.
see your authorized Dealer.
3. Push the bulb into the socket, twist the socket into the
light assembly and reinstall the light assembly into place
ensuring the locking tab is secure.
7
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES

FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U.S. Metric
Fuel (approximate)
All Engines 20 Gals 76 L
Engine Oil with Filter
3.3L and 3.8L (SAE 5W-20 API Certified) 5.0 Qts 4.7 L
4.0L (SAE 10W-30 API Certified) 5.5 Qts 5.2 L
3
Cooling System
3.3L, 3.8L and 4.0L (Use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant Five Year/
13.4 Qts 12.6 L
100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent.)
3
Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. Add 2.9 Qts (2.8 L) if equipped with a rear
heater
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS ENGINE
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Coolant Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant Five Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology) or equivalent
Oil 3.3L, 3.8L Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 engine oil. Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade, meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Oil 4.0L Use API Certified SAE 10W-30 engine oil. Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade, meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Oil Filter 3.3L, 3.8L Mopar 4105409 or equivalent
Oil Filter 4.0L Mopar 5281090 or equivalent. Refer to your oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Spark Plugs 3.3L, 3.8L, ZFR5LP-13G (Gap.050 in / 1.27 mm)
7
4.0L
Fuel 3.3L, 3.8L 87 Octane
Fuel 4.0L 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Recommended
Chassis
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS CHASSIS
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Automatic Transmission Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
Brake Master Cylinder Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3 brake fluid is
not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir Mopar Power Steering Fluid +4 or Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES N
T
E
N
A
CONTENTS N
C
E
Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . 490 Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . 493
S
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 490 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
N
T The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type, The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
E must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
N the continued proper functioning of the Emissions Con-
A On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles CHAngE OIL will flash
N trol System. These, and all other maintenance services
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
C included in this manual, should be done to provide best
E will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
S tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
C conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis-
H driving. played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
E
D indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
U
L malfunction is suspected. Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
E indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
S NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
8 performed by any automotive repair establishment or
as soon as possible, within the next 500 mi (805 km).
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 491 M
A
NOTE: than your dealer, the message can be reset by referring to I
N
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the the steps described under Oil Change Required in Use T
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles Factory Settings of the EVIC section in this manual or E
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change under Odometer/Trip Odometer in the Instrument N
A
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT Cluster Descriptions section of this manual. N
illuminated. C
At Each Stop For Fuel E
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
S
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
C
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals H
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
E
exceed 6,000 mi (10 000 km) or six months, whichever accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
D
comes first. U
the level is at or below the ADD, SAFE or MIN mark.
L
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator Check the windshield washer solvent and add if E
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If this required. S
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other 8
A
I Once A Month At Each Oil Change
N
T Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or Change the engine oil filter.
E
N damage.
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
A
N Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
C as required. CAUTION!
E
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake Failure to perform the required maintenance items
S master cylinder, power steering and transmission and
C may result in damage to the vehicle.
H add as needed.
E
D Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
U operation.
L
E
S
8
A
Required Maintenance Intervals I
N
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage T
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.) E
N
Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months A
N
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. 6,000 10 000 6 C
Rotate Tires. 6,000 10 000 6 E
If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty S
or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner 12,000 20 000 12 C
filter, replace if necessary. H
E
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. 12,000 20 000 12 D
Replace the air conditioning filter. 12,000 20 000 12 U
L
Inspect the CV Joints. Perform the first inspection at E
24,000 40 000 24
12,000 mi (20 000 km) or 12 months. S
Inspect Exhaust System. Perform the first inspection at
24,000 40 000 24 8
12,000 mi (20 000 km) or 12 months.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot
24,000 40 000 24
seals, replace if necessary.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. 30,000 50 000 30
A
I
N Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
T are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
E
N Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months
A
N Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter if
C using your vehicle for any of the following: police, 60,000 100 000 60
E taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.
S
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. 90,000 150 000 90
C Flush and replace the engine coolant. 102,000 170 000 60
H Replace the ignition cables on 3.3L, 3.8L engines. 102,000 170 000 102
E
D Replace the spark plugs on 3.3L, 3.8L, 4.0L engines. 102,000 170 000 102
U Replace the timing belt on 4.0L engines. 102,000 170 000 102
L
E Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter. 120,000 200 000 120
S Replace Accessory Drive Belt(s). 120,000 200 000 120
8 This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
A
I
WARNING! N
T
E
You can be badly injured working on or around a N
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which A
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If N
C
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a E
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic. S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 502
Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 MOPARParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Chrysler LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . 500 In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . 500 9
In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
498 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 499
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests

YOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
Prepare For The Appointment
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
If youre having warranty work done, be sure to have the
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
work to be performed may not be covered by the
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
for an appointment.
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicles
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem. The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicles problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If youve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know. authorized selling dealer. They know you and the vehicle
best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and 9
high quality service. The manufacturers authorized deal- Owners telephone number (home and office)
ers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
Authorized dealership name
tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is why you should always talk to an authorized Vehicle delivery date and mileage
dealers service manager first. Most matters can be re-
Chrysler LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 218004
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 483218004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Phone: (800) 992-1997
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the P.O. Box 1621
concern, you may contact the Manufacturers Cus- Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
tomer Center. Phone: (800) 4652001
Any communication to the Manufacturers Customer
Center should include the following information:
Owners name and address
In Mexico contact: Service Contract

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 You may have purchased a service contract for an vehicle
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
Mexico, D. F. repairs after the manufacturers New Vehicle Limited
In Mexico City: 5081-4568 Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 the manufacturers Service Contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturers Service Contract, you will receive Plan
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
manufacturers Service Contract National Customer Hot-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
line at 1-800-521-9922.
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the contract that is not the manufacturers Service Contract. It
manufacturer by dialing 1800380CHRY. is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturers Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturers Service 9
Contract, and you require service after the manufactur-

WARNING!
ers New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer
to the contract documents, and contact the person listed Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
in those documents. vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
We appreciate that you have made a major investment known to the State of California to cause cancer and
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with ucts of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
the ownership experience. Youll be pleased with their known to the State of California to cause cancer and
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related birth defects or other reproductive harm.
concerns.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)

See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of Chrysler LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle.
MOPAR PARTS To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are Hotline toll free at 18883274236 (TTY: 1800424 9153),
available from an authorized dealer. They will help keep or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
the vehicle operating at its best. tor, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the defect to the Canadian government should write to:
manufacturer. Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in 3V9.
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized 9
dealer, and the manufacturer.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

To order the following manuals, you may use either the
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
for an order form.
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
manuals (no P.O. Boxes). step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
Service Manuals
and equipment.
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
Owners Manuals
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, These Owners Manuals have been prepared with the
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLC assistance of service and engineering specialists to
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the ve- acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles.
hicle, system, and/or components is written in Included are starting, operating, emergency and main-
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, tenance procedures as well as specifications, capabili-
and charts. ties and safety tips.
Call toll free at: Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
18008904038 (U.S.)
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
18003871143 (Canada) conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
Or
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
www.techauthority.com
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
TIRE QUALITY GRADES teristics and climate.
The following tire grading categories were established by Traction Grades
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
specific grade rating assigned by the tires manufacturer and C. These grades represent the tires ability to stop on
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
your vehicle. on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor- 9
requirements in addition to these grades. mance.
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-

WARNING!
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on wheel, than the minimum required by law.
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or WARNING!
peak traction characteristics.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Temperature Grades Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat heat buildup and possible tire failure.
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
INDEX
10
508 INDEX
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 456 Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,72,74
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 69,72,74
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 443 Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 455,456,486
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321,449 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308,316 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231,342
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302,311,448 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control . . . . . . . . 307 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,74 Audio Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,285
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,72,77,93,233 Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,192
INDEX 509
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33,34 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 311 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 26
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Reset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463,488 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462,465 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464,465 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339,460
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463,488 Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 10
510 INDEX
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339,460 CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,285

Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 CD (Compact Disc) Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . 301
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 92 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,285,286,300
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,247 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Check Engine Light
Caps, Filler (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233,436
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,82,83
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432,441 Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Cargo Compartment Cleaning
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255,271,283,286
Caution, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51,94,383 Coat Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
INDEX 511
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454,457
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239,242,247 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242,247 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241,248 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Connector Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 455,486,487
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 293 Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198,471
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Console, Removable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,210 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 456 Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93,305,315
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 10
512 INDEX
Digital Video Disc (DVD) Player . . . . . . . . . . 282,285 Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Dimmer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) . . . . . . 299
Dipsticks
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102,103
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Disposal Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Electronic Range Select (ERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Domelight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 177
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 243
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Emergency, In Case of
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Drive Shaft Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412,415
Driving Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
INDEX 513
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 436,490 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92,432,433,434 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 74
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433,434 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51,94,383,446
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Extender, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51,383 Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379,486 Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468,469
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439,486,487 Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Filters
Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432,441 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321,449
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442,487
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440,486 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 10
514 INDEX
Flashers Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229,482,484 Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 487
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Flexible Fuel Vehicles Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,232,483
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Fold in Floor (Stow n Go) Seating . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386,387 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239,383
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Fluid Level Checks Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
INDEX 515
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379,486 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,27,131,378

System Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Flexible Fuel Vehicles Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391,395
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391,394
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Hands-Free Phone (UConnect) . . . . . . . 104,285,286
Hard Drive (HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,285
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Hazard
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383,385 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Gauges Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,481
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 168
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 10
516 INDEX
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81,82

Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224,225,226
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . 168 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Hitches Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 183 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159,160
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Hook, Coat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,14 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
INDEX 517
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480,481
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
LATCH Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160,168
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . . . 85 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Latches Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164,232,483
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94,159 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66,72,77,93,233 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231,342 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 10
518 INDEX
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159,160 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 226

License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212,390,392
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 233 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Locks
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161,482 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480,481 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 233 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165,482,484 Malfunction Indicator Light
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233,436
INDEX 519
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,153
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239,246 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,72,74
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . 68,69,72,74
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102,103 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236,237,238,245
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . 236,237,238,245
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439,487
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442,487
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438,503 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
MP3 Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,285 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440,486 10
520 INDEX
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104,285,286

Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441,486 Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect) . . . . . . . 104,285,286
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435,436 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 355
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Port
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100,101 Universal Serial Bus (USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,285
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334,335 USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,285
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Power
Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . 180 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234,410 Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Owners Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . 504 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102,103
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 193
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
INDEX 521
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Pretensioners Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407,428
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 300
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . 455,456 Removable Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,210
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Radio, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,286,300 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,285,286,288,298 Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . 236,237,238,245
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,285 Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308,316 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,88
Rear Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Restraints, Infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 10
522 INDEX
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Fold in Floor (Stow n Go) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,285,286,288,298 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Stow n Go (Fold in Floor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Swivel n Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 62 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80,83 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 455,487
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
INDEX 523
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Service Engine Soon Light Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255,271,283,286 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Steering
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165,229,482,484 Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Sliding Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347,451
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Shaft Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Sound Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,285 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,364,413 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206,479
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320,479 10
524 INDEX
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Stow n Go (Fold in Floor) Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94,359,505
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 66 Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Swivel n Go Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 311 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . 233,411 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412,415
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355,356
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 355 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
INDEX 525
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351,359 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334,335
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463,488
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407,428 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463,488
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Transmitter Battery Service
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Traction Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . 183 10
526 INDEX
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 21 Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241,248

Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356,390,392
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165,229,482,484 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320,479
Video Entertainment System
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 (Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
UConnect (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . 104,285
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 293 Warning Lights
Universal Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port . . . . . . . . . . . 282,285 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,285 Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
INDEX 527
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166,453

Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40,192 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . 469
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Rear Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Zone Control (Temperature Control) . . . . . . . . . . 307
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
vehicles electronic system to provide immunity to radio routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone only fully shielded coaxial cable.
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
The positive power connection should be made directly
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
normal may require special precautions.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
This connection should not be fused. ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicles electronic systems.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
2008 Town & Countr y
2008
OWNER S MANUAL
Town & Countr y
81-026-0817 Third Edition Rev 1 Printed in U.S.A.

2008 Town and Country OM 3rd R1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2008 Town and Country OM 3rd R1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2008 Town and Country OM 3rd R1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2008 Town & Countr y

INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

Sliding Side Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode

Rear Seat Delete Feature Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

Integrated Ignition Key

Tip Start Feature

NOTE: Replacement Keys

Arming The System Disarm The System

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) IF Using The RKE Transmitter

Programming Additional RKE Transmitters

General Information REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED

How To Use Remote Start To Enter Remote Start Mode

Sliding Door Lock Features

For personal security and safety in the event of an

WINDOWS POWER WINDOWS

Power Vent Window Switches

Drivers Power Window Switches

Front Passenger Power Switches

There are also power sliding side door switches located

Power Sliding Door Detail

Sliding Side Door Child Protection Lock

Overhead Console Power Sliding Door Master Switch

To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock NOTE:

To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock

Overhead Console Master Power Switch Detail

The power liftgate must be in the full open or close

Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Strap If

Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever

NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside

ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the

Two people should never be belted into a single seat

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect

A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.

When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Seat Belt Pretensioners

Front Passenger Airbag Special Features

Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain

moderate to severe side collisions. In certain types of

impact sensors signals, a central electronic ORC deploys

Maintaining Your Airbag System

3. Requested by police under a legal warrant. Impact acceleration and angle

Second Row Bench Seat With Integrated Child Seat

Safety experts recommend that children ride

located in the rear surface of the seatback. In addition, all

Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting

Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses

REAR SEAT DELETE FEATURE (COMMERCIAL 2

VEHICLE EQUIPPED WITH THE REAR SEAT DE-

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE Exhaust Gas

If you are required to drive with the deck lid / liftgate

Driver Memory Seat If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 153 Adjustable Pedals If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 175